604243
462
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/464
Pagina verder
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance and
care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle specifi-
cations
Detailed vehicle information.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this man-
ual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys...................................... 30
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart entry & start
system ................................ 33
Wireless remote control........ 51
Doors .................................... 55
Trunk..................................... 58
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats............................ 63
Rear seats ............................ 67
Head restraints ..................... 69
Seat belts.............................. 71
Steering wheel...................... 78
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror .................................. 79
Outside rear view
mirrors ................................ 80
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows..................... 83
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel
tank cap.............................. 87
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system................................ 91
Double locking system ....... 100
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture....... 102
SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................. 104
Child restraint systems....... 133
Installing child
restraints .......................... 141
Airbag manual on-off
system.............................. 151
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.............. 156
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)........ 169
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart entry &
start system) .................... 178
Automatic transmission...... 181
Manual Transmission......... 188
Turn signal lever................. 191
Parking brake..................... 192
Horn ................................... 193
1
Before driving
2
When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 194
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 198
Multi-information
display .............................. 203
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch.................. 208
Fog light switch................... 215
Windshield wipers and
washer.............................. 217
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control...................... 220
Driving assist systems ........ 225
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 231
Winter driving tips ............... 233
Trailer towing ...................... 237
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system .............................. 240
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................. 248
Rear window and
outside rear view mirror
defoggers.......................... 256
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/
USB port .......................... 258
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 259
Interior light ...................... 260
3-4. Using the storage
features
List of storage features....... 261
Glove box......................... 262
Bottle holders................... 263
Cup holders/
console tray...................... 264
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 266
Vanity mirrors..................... 267
Clock .................................. 268
Outside temperature
display.............................. 269
Ashtray............................... 270
Power outlets ..................... 271
Seat heaters....................... 273
Floor mat............................ 275
Trunk features.................... 278
3
Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior
............. 282
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 285
Cleaning and protecting
the Alcantara
®
area .......... 289
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements..................... 291
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 294
Hood ................................... 297
Positioning a floor jack........ 299
Engine compartment........... 301
Tires.................................... 314
Tire inflation pressure ......... 323
Wheels................................ 325
Air conditioning filter ........... 328
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery........ 331
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 335
Light bulbs .......................... 343
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ........... 362
If your vehicle needs to
be towed .......................... 363
If you think something is
wrong ............................... 370
Fuel pump shut off
system.............................. 371
5-2. Steps to take in
an emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ......................... 372
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with
a spare tire)...................... 384
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with
an emergency tire
puncture repair kit)........... 393
If the engine will
not start............................ 409
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P................... 412
If you lose your keys .......... 413
If the electronic key does
not operate properly......... 414
If the battery is
discharged ....................... 418
4
Maintenance and care
5
When trouble arises
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
If your vehicle overheats..... 423
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 426
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in
an emergency................... 428
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)............ 432
Fuel information.................. 445
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 447
Abbreviation list ........................ 450
Alphabetical index..................... 451
What to do if... ........................... 462
6
Vehicle specifications
Index
6
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 80
Pictorial index
Exterior
Hood
P. 297
Windshield wipers
P. 217
Headlights (high beam)
P. 208
Front position lights
P. 208
Headlights (low beam)
P. 208
Turn signal lights
P. 191
Turn signal lights
P. 191
Front fog lights
Daytime running lights (vehicles with
halogen headlights)
P. 215
P. 208
Daytime running lights (vehicle with
discharge headlights)
P. 208
7
Tires
Rotation
Replacement
Temporary repair
Inflation pressure
P. 314
P. 384
P. 393
P. 323
Rear window defogger
P. 256
Trunk
P. 58
Doors
P. 55
Fuel filler door
P. 87
Turn signal lights
P. 191
: If equipped
License plate lights
P. 208
Tail lights
P. 208
Rear fog light
P. 215
8
Pictorial index
Interior
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
Power outlet
P. 271
Head restraints
P. 69
Seat belts
P. 71
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 104
Cup holders
Console tray
P. 264
P. 264
SRS side airbags
P. 104
Front seats
P. 63
Glove box
P. 262
SRS curtain shield
airbags
P. 104
Child restraint
anchor brackets
P. 141
9
A
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 79
Interior light
P. 260
Vanity mirrors
P. 267
Sun visors*
P. 266
*: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat
protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P. 149)
: If equipped
10
Inside door lock buttons
P. 56
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 80
Window lock switch
P. 83
Power window switches
P. 83
Door lock switch
P. 56
B
Pictorial index
Interior
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
11
: If equipped
C
Shift lever
P. 181, 188
Parking brake lever
P. 192
VSC/TRC off switch
P. 226
Seat heater switches
P. 273
“VSC SPORT” switch
P. 226
Power outlet
P. 271
Shift lock override button
P. 412
Driving pattern selector switch
P. 183
12
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 208
P. 191
P. 215
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 194
P. 203
Clock
P. 268
Windshield wiper and washer switch
P. 217
Emergency flasher
switch
P. 362
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever
P. 78
Floor mat
P. 275
Hood lock release lever
P. 297
Fuel filler door opener
P. 87
SRS driver knee airbag
P. 104
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a
smart entry & start system)
P. 169
AUX/USB port
P. 258
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
13
A
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Air conditioning
system
P. 240
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch
/rear window defogger switch
P. 256
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defoggers switch
P. 256
Air conditioning
system
P. 248
: If equipped
14
C
BB
Paddle shift switches
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles
without a smart entry & start system)
P. 178
Cruise control switch
P. 220
Horn
SRS driver airbag
P. 193
P. 104
Instrument panel light control dial
P. 196
Manual headlight leveling dial
P. 210
Trunk opener
P. 58
: If equipped
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
P. 316
15
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 104
Head restraints
P. 69
Seat belts
P. 71
Child restraint anchor brackets
P. 141
Power outlet
P. 271
Glove box
P. 262
Front seats
P. 63
SRS side airbags
P. 104
Cup holders
Console tray
P. 264
P. 264
SRS curtain shield
airbags
P. 104
: If equipped
16
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 79
Interior light
P. 260
Sun visors*
P. 266
Vanity mirrors
P. 267
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
*: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat
protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P. 149)
17
B
Inside door lock buttons
P. 56
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 80
Window lock switch
P. 83
Power window switches
P. 83
Door lock switch
P. 56
: If equipped
18
C
Shift lock override button
P. 412
Shift lever
Parking brake lever
P. 192
VSC/TRC off switch
P. 226
Seat heater switches
P. 273
Driving pattern selector switch
P. 183
“VSC SPORT” switch
P. 226
Power outlet
P. 271
: If equipped
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
19
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever
P. 78
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 194
P. 203
Clock
P. 268
Windshield wiper and
washer switch
P. 217
Emergency flasher
switch
P. 362
Floor mat
P. 275
Hood lock release lever
P. 297
Fuel filler door opener
P. 87
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a
smart entry & start system)
P. 169
SRS driver knee airbag
P. 104
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 208
P. 191
P. 215
AUX/USB port
P. 258
: If equipped
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
20
A
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch
/rear window defogger switch
P. 256
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Air conditioning
system
P. 240
Air conditioning
system
P. 248
Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defoggers switch
P. 256
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
21
C
B
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles
without a smart entry & start system)
P. 178
Cruise control switch
P. 220
Horn
SRS driver airbag
P. 193
P. 104
Instrument panel light control dial
P. 196
Manual headlight leveling dial
P. 210
Trunk opener
P. 58
: If equipped
Paddle shift switches
P. 184, 186
Tire pressure warning system reset switch
P. 316
22
For your information
Main Owners Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-
cles are currently available in the market. Using these spare parts and
accessories which are not genuine Toyota produces may adversely affect
the safety of your vehicle, even though these parts may be approved by cer-
tain authorities in your country. Toyota Motor Corporation therefore cannot
accept any liability or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not
genuine Toyota Products, nor for replacement or installation involving such
parts.
This vehicle should not be modified with non genuine Toyota products. Modi-
fication with non genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-
tion, damage or performance problem resulting from the modification may
not be covered under warranty.
23
Installation of an RF-transmitter system
The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-
tronic systems such as:
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Cruise control system
Anti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.
Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-
tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is
available on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
24
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
For use by Toyota in a law suit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
25
Scrapping your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional, before you scrap your vehicle.
CAUTION
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
26
Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them into
the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive 2006/66/
EC).
27
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and
other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
28
1
Before driving
29
1-1. Key information
Keys.................................... 30
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart entry & start
system .............................. 33
Wireless remote control...... 51
Doors.................................. 55
Trunk .................................. 58
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.......................... 63
Rear seats .......................... 67
Head restraints ................... 69
Seat belts............................ 71
Steering wheel.................... 78
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror........................ 79
Outside rear view
mirrors .............................. 80
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows................... 83
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................... 87
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 91
Double locking system...... 100
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ..... 102
SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) ............... 104
Child restraint systems ..... 133
Installing child
restraints......................... 141
Airbag manual on-off
system ............................ 151
30
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Keys (with a wireless
remote control function)
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 51)
Key (without a wireless
remote control function)
Key number plate
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Electronic keys
Operating the smart entry &
start system (P. 33)
Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 51)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
31
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever and take
the key out.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or entry
function does not operate prop-
erly, you will need the mechanical
key. (P. 414)
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key
(without a smart entry & start system) or mechanical key (with a smart entry
& start system) is lost, a new key can be made by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, using
the key number plate. (P. 413)
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
32
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
Do not disassemble the keys.
Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Do not place the keys near
objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems, induc-
tion cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency ther-
apy equipment.
Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related
problems (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately with all remaining keys that was provided
with your vehicle.
33
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart entry & start system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 34)
Unlocks the trunk (
P. 35)
Starts the engine (P. 169)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
: If equipped
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Vehicles without double lock-
ing system
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
Vehicles with double locking
system
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger’s door handle to unlock all
the doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the side of the
door handle) to lock the doors.
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 0.4 - 0.8 m (1.3 -
2.6 ft.) of either of the outside
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 0.4 - 0.8 m (1.3 -
2.6 ft.) of the trunk release
button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Operation signals
The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/
unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor
Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting
from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures for the warning light
that comes on. (P. 380)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock either door by opening
a door and putting the
inside lock button into the
lock position, then closing
the door by pulling on the
outside door handle with
the electronic key still
inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How-
ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be
detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
smart entry & start system
while the electronic key
was still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
to ACCESSORY mode
while the drivers door was
open (or the driver’s door
was opened while the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was in ACCES-
SORY mode).
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
off and close the
driver’s door.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously*
The driver’s door was
opened while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
Shift the shift lever to
P.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec-
tronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
In the following situations, the smart entry & start system may take some
time to unlock the doors.
The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 2 m (6 ft.)
of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
The smart entry & start system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
If the smart entry & start system has not been used for 14 days or longer,
the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the drivers door.
In this case, take hold of the drivers door handle, or use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Conditions affecting operation
The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situ-
ations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may
be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system, wireless remote con-
trol and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Way of coping P. 414)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
Metallic wallets or bags
Coins
Hand warmers made of metal
Media such as CDs and DVDs
When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-
munication device
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
Digital audio players
Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Notes for the entry function
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or
floor, in the door pockets or glove box or auxiliary box when the engine
is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
electronic key inside the vehicle.
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after
approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Notes for locking the doors
Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
Vehicles without a double locking system: When the lock operation is
performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to
two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec-
tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or
more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-
len), and continue to wash the vehicle.
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
Notes for the unlocking function
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle
again.
If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec-
tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or
more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-
len), and continue to wash the vehicle.
If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m
(6 ft.) of the vehicle.
The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 447)
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not
get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system
from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate prop-
erly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention func-
tion may not operate.)
Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on
the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the trunk),
conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio
waves in the surrounding area. (P. 59)
If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechani-
cal key. (P. 414)
Starting the engine:P. 415
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Electronic key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (P. 380)
As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 331)
The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not
operate.
The detection area becomes smaller.
The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key close to
any of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Induction cookers
Table lamps
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 331
If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized
setting
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the wireless
remote control or mechanical key. (P. 51, 414)
Starting the engine and changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes: P. 415
Stopping the engine: P. 417
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Settings (e. g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 447)
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Certification for smart entry & start system
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
-Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
-Dispose of used batterites according to the local laws.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main-
tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry &
start system antennas. (P. 35)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for details,
such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry
function.
User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details for disabling the entry function.
51
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Locks both side doors
*1
Locks driver’s door
*2
Unlocks both side doors
*1
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks both side door
*2
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Locks both side doors
*1
Locks driver’s door
*2
Unlocks both side doors
*1
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks both side door
*2
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
*1
: Vehicles with a double locking system
*2
: Vehicles without a double locking system
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Operation signals
The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/
unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
When the wireless key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
P. 40
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with
a smart entry & start system)
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechanical
key. (P. 414)
Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 331)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
P. 44
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 331
Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details.
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Certification for wireless remote control
-Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
-Dispose of used batterites according to the local laws.
55
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
P. 34
Wireless remote control
P. 51
Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Locks both side doors
*1
Locks driver’s door
*2
Unlocks both side doors
*1
Turning the key unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks driver’s door
*2
*1
: Vehicles with a double locking system
*2
: Vehicles without a double locking system
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 414)
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door while pulling the door handle.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Door lock switch
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
STEP
1
STEP
2
57
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Window open/close function linked to door operation
In order to make opening and closing the doors easier, completely closed
windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its
window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely.
However, if the battery has discharged or is disconnected, this function will
not operate. (P. 422)
If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a double locking system)
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized
setting (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 51, 414)
CAUTION
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always use a seat belt.
Ensure that both side doors are properly closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the key, trunk opener, entry function
or wireless remote control.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press and hold the opener
switch to release the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Key (vehicles without a smart entry & start system and the
double locking system)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
Entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
P. 35
Wireless remote control
P. 51
59
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key
inside (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic
key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.
Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors
locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the
trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys
with you when leaving the vehicle.
Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are
locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the
surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre-
vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the
trunk.
The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one
of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk
opener.
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start system
but without the double locking system)
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 414)
60
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow children to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat
exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.
Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
61
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly
shut again after it is opened.
The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the trunk lid on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make
sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
62
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
NOTICE
Trunk damper stays
The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to trunk damper stays, resulting in a
malfunction.
Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and
adhesives to damper stay rods.
Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid.
Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it.
63
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
Seatback fold strap (if
equipped)
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Getting in and out of the rear seats
To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever or seatback fold strap.
Before getting in or out of the rear seats
Release the seat belt from the seat belt guide. (P. 72)
Getting in the rear seats
Drivers side (if equipped)
Lift the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever.
The seatback will fold forward.
Passengers side
Lift the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever.
The seatback will fold forward.
The seat can be slid forward and
backward.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Getting out of the rear seats
Drivers side (if equipped)
Pull the seatback fold strap.
The seatback will fold forward.
Passengers side
Pull the seatback fold strap.
The seatback will fold forward.
The seat can be slid forward and
backward.
After getting in or out of the rear seats
Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks.
Front passenger seat only: The seat will lock in position at the point where
the seatback reaches the upright position.
Seat dust cover
Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-
chase before using the seat.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
Take care not to hit passengers with the seat.
When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the
rear passengers.
When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment
while holding down the seatback.
Do not pull on or use the front seat belt guide to adjust or fold the front
seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
When driving the vehicle
Never operate the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap.
Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Getting in and out of the rear seats
When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands,
legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts.
When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat
rails.
After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is
locked in position.
When operating the front seat from the rear seat
Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat.
67
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Rear seats
Seat dust cover
Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-
chase before using the seat.
CAUTION
When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv-
ing.
Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
Press the seatback lock
release buttons and fold the
seatback down.
Press the button until the lock
is released.
To return the seatbacks to its
original position, lift it up until it
locks.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
Before using the rear seat belts
Make sure that the seatback is
securely locked in position by lightly
pushing it back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked,
the red portion behind the seatback
lock release button will be visible.
Make sure that the red portion is not
visible.
Always make sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the seatback or twisted in one
of the hooks that secure the seatback.
Failure to do so may cause the seat belt
to not be fastened correctly or to become
ineffective in a collision, resulting in death
or serious injury.
69
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
Removing the head restraints
Installing the head restraints
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Pull the head restraint up while pushing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
CAUTION
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
Use head restraints designed for each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
71
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fasten the seat belt
Push the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
Release the seat belt
Press the release button.
Release button
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seat belt guide
To enable the seat belt to be
easily extended, pass the seat
belt through the guide.
When getting in or out of the rear
seats, release the seat belt from
the guide.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult
size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 133)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 71 regarding seat belt usage.
Seat belt pretensioners
Seat belt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal or
side impact, in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.
The following four components operate simultaneously.
Seat belt pretensioner for driver
Seat belt pretensioner for front passenger
SRS frontal airbag for driver
SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passen-
ger’s seat belt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional. When replacing seat belt retractor assemblies for the front
seating positions, use only genuine Toyota parts equipped with a force
limiter.
If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a
malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional as soon as possible.
If the front seat belt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it
has seat belt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this
section.
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional, for seat belt replacement or installation.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
Always wear a seat belt properly.
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Pregnant women
People with a medical condition
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 71)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright posi-
tion with their seat belts properly fastened.
Do not modify, remove or strike the front seat belt retractor assemblies or
surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seat belt
pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in
serious injury. Seat belt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For
required servicing of front seat belt retractors equipped with seat belt pre-
tensioners, see any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
When discarding front seat belt retractor assemblies or scrapping the
entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
77
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from
operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
When using the seat belt guide
Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the
guide.
Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seat
belt guide button.
Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.
Before using the rear seat belts
Always make sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the seatback or twisted in one
of the hooks that secure the seatback.
Failure to do so may cause the seat belt
to not be fastened correctly or to become
ineffective in a collision, resulting in death
or serious injury.
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
79
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be
reduced by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirrors position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating
posture.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Folding the mirrors
Manual operation
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Power operation (if equipped)
Press the switch to fold the mir-
rors.
Press it again to extend them to
the original position.
The mirrors can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.
Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror
defoggers. (P. 256)
82
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
83
1
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window glasses.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing
*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
84
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
85
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, close all the doors and perform the following operations using the
power window switch on the relevant door.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: After stopping the
vehicle, the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: After stopping the vehi-
cle, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position two
consecutive times.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again and continue holding for 1 second or more after the win-
dow closes completely.
If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the win-
dow is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to
close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
86
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
CAUTION
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (P. 83)
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart
entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with
a smart entry & start system) off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc.,
that may possibly lead to an accident.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
87
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine
switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are
closed.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off and ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 88)
Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
88
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
Fuel types
EU area:
Unleaded gasoline confirming to European standard EN228, Research
Octane Number of 98 or higher
Except EU area:
Unleaded gasoline, Research Octane Number of 98 or higher
If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 RON is not available,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no
detriment to engine durability or driveability.
Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content
is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a
Research Octane Number that follows the above.
89
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not handle fuel indoors.
After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
90
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
Do not top off the fuel tank.
Observe other precautions that are posted at the service station.
Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If
the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of
an accident, creating a fire hazard.
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle's painted surface.
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning
agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to
the engine.
91
1
Before driving
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
Vehicles without a smart
entry & start system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
92
1-6. Theft deterrent system
When the vehicle cannot be started with the registered key (vehicles
without a smart entry & start system)
Remove the key and try again.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
If the key is in contact with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
Vehicles with a smart entry
& start system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
93
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)
94
1-6. Theft deterrent system
95
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
96
1-6. Theft deterrent system
97
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles without a smart
entry & start system)
98
1-6. Theft deterrent system
99
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
100
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Double locking system
Setting the double locking system
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch
off, have all the passengers exit the vehicle and ensure that all the
doors are closed.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off, have all the passengers exit the vehicle and ensure
that all the doors are closed.
Using the entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system):
Press the lock button on the outside door handle.
Using the wireless remote control:
Press .
: If equipped
Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the
door unlocking function from both the interior and exterior of the
vehicle.
Vehicles employing this sys-
tem have labels on the win-
dow glass of both front doors.
101
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Double locking system precaution
Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehi-
cle because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.
102
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 63)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 63)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able. (P. 63)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel to allow easy opera-
tion and to ensure the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 78)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 69)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 71)
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
While driving
Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent resulting in serious injury or death. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
104
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is
used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seat
belts.
Models with SRS airbags and seat belts for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system to
supplement the seat belts for the front seats and rear window-side
seating positions.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of seven air-
bags. The configurations are as follows.
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When you sell your vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Front airbags for driver and front passenger
Knee airbag for driver
Side airbags for driver and front passenger
Curtain shield airbags for driver, front passenger and window-
side rear passengers
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the pri-
mary protection provided by the seat belt.
The system also controls front seat belt pretensioners. For opera-
tion instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt preten-
sioner, refer to “Seat belt pretensioners”. (
P. 72)
106
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag
To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and
all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat belts when the vehi-
cle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the
primary protection provided by the seat belt. It does not eliminate the need
to fasten seat belts. In combination with the seat belts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a
crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, refer to
“Seat belts”. (P. 71)
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed - faster than the blink of an
eye - and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag
can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can
result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position
such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occu-
pant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or
arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants
who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer
very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehi-
cle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between
you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could
interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle
and cause injury.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
SRS airbag
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger’s seat, or
never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if
they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
Put children in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child restraint
device or in a seat belt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s age, height
and weight. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, espe-
cially if they are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because chil-
dren are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions con-
cerning the child restraint system, refer
to “Child restraint systems”. (P. 133)
108
1-7. Safety information
NOTICE
When the SRS airbag deploys
When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke
could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after
SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS airbag system components
Front sub sensor (right-hand
side)
Front airbag module (driver's
side)
Front passengers front air-
bag ON and OFF indicator
(center of instrument panel)
Front airbag module (front
passengers side)
Front passengers front air-
bag cut off switch (passen-
ger’s side of instrument
panel)
Door impact sensor (right-
hand side)
Curtain shield airbag mod-
ule (right-hand side)
Airbag wiring
Side airbag module (front
passengers side)
Side airbag sensor (center
pillar right-hand side)
Curtain shield airbag sensor
(rear wheel house right-hand
side)
Seat belt pretensioner (front
passenger’s side)
Satellite safing sensor
(under the center of the rear
seats)
Curtain shield airbag sensor
(rear wheel house left-hand
side)
Side airbag module (driver’s
side)
Seat belt pretensioner
(driver’s side)
Side airbag sensor (center
pillar left-hand side)
110
1-7. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag control module. The
airbag control module consists of an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe front or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-
tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
Door impact sensor (left-
hand side)
Driver’s knee airbag module
Airbag control module
(including impact sensors)
Front sub sensor (left-hand
side)
Curtain shield airbag mod-
ule (left-hand side)
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS front airbag
The driver’s SRS front airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering
wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is stowed under the steering column. The
passenger’s SRS front airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under
an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe front collision, the following components deploy.
SRS front airbag for driver
SRS front airbag for front passenger
Knee airbag for driver
These components supplement the seat belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
Front-seat passenger airbag manual cut off switch
The passenger-side front airbag can be deactivated by the cut off switch
located in the instrumental panel side. When the cut off switch is turned to
the deactivation mode the passenger-side front airbag becomes deacti-
vated. When the cutoff switch is turned to the activation mode the passen-
ger-side front airbag becomes active to deploy. While the passenger-side
front airbag is active the A/B ON indicator is illuminated.
112
1-7. Safety information
Normal operation
When the system is malfunctioning
ON OFF
Front airbag for front passenger Activated Deactivated
Seat belt pretensioner for front pas-
senger
Activated ActivatedSide air bag for front passenger
Curtain shield air bag for front pas-
senger
SRS warning light Not illuminated Not illuminated
Airbag manual on-off indicator “ON” Illuminated Not illuminated
Airbag manual on-off indicator
“OFF”
Not illuminated Illuminated
Airbag manual on-off
switch
Airbag system
Airbag system Operation
Front airbag for front passenger Deactivated
Seat belt pretensioner for front pas-
senger
ActivatedSide air bag for front passenger
Curtain shield air bag for front pas-
senger
SRS warning light Illuminated
Airbag manual on-off indicator “ON” Not illuminated
Airbag manual on-off indicator
“OFF”
Illuminated
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Operation
Driver's side
*: Models with knee airbag
Passengers side
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start
to deflate immediately so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed.
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start
to deflate immediately so that the
driver's vision is not obstructed.
114
1-7. Safety information
The SRS airbag can function only when the engine switch is in the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a
smart entry & start system).
If the front sub sensors located on both the right and left sides at the front of
the vehicle and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a cer-
tain predetermined amount of force during a front collision, the control mod-
ule sends signals to the front airbag modules instructing them to inflate the
SRS front airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which instantly
inflates driver’s and passenger’s SRS front airbags. The knee airbag is also
inflated in combination with the SRS front airbags.
After deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to
the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-
accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not
obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver's ability to maintain con-
trol of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal
result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The SRS front airbag (and also the knee airbag) is designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate to severe front collision. It is not
designed to deploy in most lesser front impacts because the necessary pro-
tection can be achieved by the seat belt alone. Also, it is not designed to
deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents because
deployment of the SRS front airbag would not help the occupant in those sit-
uations.
The SRS airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the
passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of
collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done
to the vehicle itself.
When will the SRS front airbag most likely deploy?
At what other times might the SRS front airbag deploy?
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speeds of 20 to 30
km/h (12 to 19 mph) or higher activates
the SRS front airbag. The SRS front air-
bag will also be activated when the vehi-
cle is exposed to a front impact similar in
fashion and magnitude to the collision
described above.
The SRS front airbag may be activated
when the vehicle sustains a hard impact
in the undercarriage area from the road
surface (such as when the vehicle
plunges into a deep ditch, is severely
impacted or knocked hard against an
obstacle on the road such as a curb).
116
1-7. Safety information
When is the SRS front airbag unlikely to deploy?
The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
front impact.
The vehicle sustains an offset front colli-
sion.
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS
front airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the
SRS front airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces
involved.
When will the SRS front airbag not deploy?
The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked vehi-
cle.
The SRS front airbag is not designed to
deploy in most cases if the vehicle is
struck from the side or from behind, or if it
rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved
in a low-speed front collision.
118
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS front airbag precaution
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel
and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause
burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
First impact
Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the SRS front
airbag deploys only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double colli-
sion, first with another vehicle, then
against a concrete wall in immediate suc-
cession, once the SRS front airbag is
activated on the first impact, it will not be
activated on the second.
119
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback,
which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door
panel and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s
chest.
The curtain shield airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG”
mark is located at the top of each front and rear pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain shield airbag on
the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occu-
pant’s head.
Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag can function only when
the engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry &
start system) or when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system).
120
1-7. Safety information
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield
airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact
sensor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy independently of the
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS front airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the left
and right center pillars, doors and rear wheel houses. Another impact sen-
sor, which also senses impact force, is located under the rear center seat.
If one of the center pillar impact sensors and the impact sensor that is
located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side to
inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the
same side senses an impact.
If one of the rear wheel house impact sensors and the impact sensor that is
located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes only the
SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The
time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag
after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain shield
airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy even when no
one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released.
These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to deploy
in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact colli-
sion. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most front or most rear impacts because SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment would not help the
occupant in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to func-
tion on a onetime-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment depend on the
level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side
impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it
may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
When will the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag most
likely deploy?
When are the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag unlikely to
deploy?
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain shield airbag.
The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
122
1-7. Safety information
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield air-
bag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
123
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When will the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag not
deploy?
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to
deploy in most cases if the vehicle is involved in a front collision or is struck
from behind. Examples of such accidents are illustrated.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle
and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are activated on the first impact,
they will not be activated on the second.
The vehicle is involved in front collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
The vehicle is struck from behind.
SRS curtain shield airbag
SRS side airbag
Second impact
First impact
124
1-7. Safety information
When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional as soon as possible.
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard or lower portion of the
instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
If the SRS airbags deploy
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat
seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns
because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain shield airbag sys-
tem (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing
so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the cen-
ter of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm
(10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
126
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the
road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-
ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-
ment panel controls.
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 133)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad or lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver, front passenger and
knee airbags deploy.
128
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (P. 109).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, rear quarter glass, front or rear
pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
(Except for the speed limit label
P. 397)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start
system only: Do not attach any heavy,
sharp or hard objects such as keys and
accessories to the key. The objects
may restrict the SRS knee airbag infla-
tion or be thrust into the driver's seat
area by the force of the deploying air-
bag, thus causing a danger.
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed only to
be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat belt. They
do not do away with the need to fasten seat belts. It is also important to
wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant
is not seated in a proper upright position.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails.
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches.
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players.
Installation of electronic devices such as an RF-transmitter and CD play-
ers.
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
130
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag system monitor
SRS warning light
A diagnostic system continually
monitors the readiness of the
SRS airbag system (including
front seat belt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven.
The SRS warning light will show
normal system operation by illu-
minating for approximately 6
seconds when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without a smart entry &
start system), or the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart entry & start sys-
tem).
The following components are monitored by the indicator.
Front sub sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Airbag control module (including impact sensor)
Front airbag module
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
Knee airbag module (drivers side)
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Side airbag sensor
Center pillar right-hand side
Center pillar left-hand side
Side airbag module
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
Curtain shield airbag sensor
Rear wheel house right-hand side
Rear wheel house left-hand side
Curtain shield airbag module
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats)
Seat belt pretensioner
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
All related wiring
Door impact sensor
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Front passenger’s front airbag cut off switch (passenger's side of
instrument panel)
Front passenger’s front airbag ON and OFF indicator
132
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS warning light
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a
malfunction in the seat belt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. We
recommend that you have the system checked immediately by your nearest
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seat belt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags
may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which
may increase the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the warning light
No illumination of the warning light when the engine switch is first turned to
the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system), or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart entry & start system).
Continuous illumination of the warning light
Illumination of the warning light while driving
133
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 141)
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you
reside, please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for the child
restraint system installation.
Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which
conforms to the regulation “ECE No.44”.
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups
according to the regulation ECE No.44:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)
Group 0
+
: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)
In this owner's manual, the following popular 3 types of child restraint
systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained.
Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.
134
1-7. Safety information
Baby seat
Equal to Group 0 and 0
+
of ECE
No.44
Child seat
Equal to Group 0
+
and I of ECE
No.44
Junior seat
Equal to Group II and III of ECE
No.44
135
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system
suitability for various seating positions.
Front passenger seat
Rear seat
Airbag manual on-off
switch
ON
OFF
0 (up to 10 kg [22 lb.])
X
Never put
L3, L4 X
0
+
(up to 13 kg [28 lb.])
X
Never put
L3, L4 X
I (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])
Rear-facing
X
Never put
L1 U
Forward-
facing
L1
II, III (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.]) L2, L5
L2, L5
U, L2
Mass groups
Seating position
136
1-7. Safety information
Note
When you use child restraint system on the front passenger seat, you
must turn off the airbag manual on-off switch.
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved
for the use in this mass group.
L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+” (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.]) approved
for the use in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID FIX” (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])
approved for the use in this mass group.
L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA G 0+,BABY SAFE PLUS” (up to 13 kg [28
lb.]) approved for the use in this mass group.
L4: Suitable for “TOYOTA G 0+,BABY SAFE PLUS with SEAT BELT
FIXATION, BASE PLATFORM” (up to 13 kg [28 lb.]) approved for
the use in this mass group.
L5: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID” (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.]) approved
for the use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in
the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-
fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and
retailer.
137
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
(with ISOFIX rigid anchors)
Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system
suitability for various seating positions.
Mass groups
Size
class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Rear seat
Carrycot
F
ISO/L1
X
G
ISO/L2
X
(1) X
0 (up to 10 kg
[22 lb.])
E
ISO/R1
X
(1) X
0
+
(up to 13 kg
[28 lb.])
E
ISO/R1
X
D
ISO/R2
X
C
ISO/R3
X
(1) X
I (9 to 18 kg
[20 to 39 lb.])
D
ISO/R2
X
C
ISO/R3
X
B
ISO/F2
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
IUF
A
ISO/F3
X
(1) X
II (15 to 25 kg
[34 to 55 lb.])
(1) X
III (22 to 36 kg
[49 to 79 lb.])
(1) X
138
1-7. Safety information
(1) For the CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identifica-
tion (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufac-
turer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint
system(s) recommended for each position.
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal
category approved for use in this mass group.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems
in this mass group and/or this size class.
The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in
the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-
fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and
retailer.
139
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
adjust the following:
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 71)
CAUTION
Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-
erly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the
event of sudden braking or an accident).
Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
The seat cushion to the fully rearward
position
The seatback to the most upright posi-
tion
140
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat
when the airbag manual on-off switch is on. (P. 151)
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.
A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed
on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the
seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could
inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-
ment.
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
141
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a ISOFIX
rigid anchors. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.
Installation with a seat belt
(
P. 142)
ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX
child restraint system)
Lower anchors are provided for
the both rear seats. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Anchor bracket (for top strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for both rear seats.
142
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt
Rear facing Baby seat/child seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Follow the directions given in the
child restraint system installation
manual and fix the child restraint
system securely in place.
If your child restraint system is
not equipped with a lock-off (a
seat belt locking feature), secure
the child restraint system using a
locking clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
STEP
1
STEP
2
143
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Forward facing Child seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Follow the directions given in the
child restraint system installation
manual and fix the child restraint
system securely in place.
If your child restraint system is
not equipped with a lock-off (a
seat belt locking feature), secure
the child restraint system using a
locking clip.
After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
STEP
1
STEP
2
144
1-7. Safety information
Junior seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 71)
STEP
1
STEP
2
145
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint system)
Latch the buckles onto the exclu-
sive fixing bars.
If the child restraint has a top
strap, the top strap should be
latched onto the anchor bracket.
146
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems with a top strap
Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid
anchor.
Remove the anchor bracket
cover.
Store the removed cover in a safe
place.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
147
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When installing a child restraint system (without a lock-off) using a
seat belt
You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system using a seat belt.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your
child restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the
following item from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
When installing a child restraint system with ISOFIX rigid anchors and
a top strap
Depending on the child restraint system's size and shape, if the child
restraint system is installed to the fixing bars first, it may not be possible to
attach the top strap to the anchor bracket.
In that case, first temporarily attach the top strap to the anchor bracket,
install the child restraint system using the ISOFIX rigid anchors and then
tighten the top strap.
148
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident.
If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat (left-hand drive vehicles)
or the left-hand rear seat (right-hand
drive vehicles).
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as pos-
sible.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
149
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
Never use a rear-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat
when the airbag manual on-off switch is
on. (P. 151)
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to children in the event
of an accident.
There is a label(s) on the passenger
side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden
to attach a rear-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat.
Details of the label(s) are shown in the
illustration below.
150
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,
please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-
tion.
When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, choking or other serious injuries may result
in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be
used to cut the belt.
Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.
151
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Airbag manual on-off system
This system deactivates the front passenger airbag.
Only deactivate the airbags when using a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
Airbag manual on-off indica-
tor
Vehicles without a smart
entry & start system
This indicator light turns on
when the airbag system is on
(only when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position).
Vehicles with a smart entry &
start system
This indicator light turns on
when the airbag system is on
(only when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode).
Airbag manual on-off switch
152
1-7. Safety information
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Vehicles without a smart entry
& start system
Insert the key into the cylinder
and turn to the “OFF” position.
The “OFF” indicator light turns on
(only when the engine switch is in
the “ON” position).
Vehicles with a smart entry &
start system
Insert the mechanical key into
the cylinder and rotate to the
“OFF” position.
The “OFF” indicator light turns on
(only when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode).
153
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Airbag manual on-off indicator information
The front passenger’s front airbag ON and OFF indicators shows you the
status of the front passengers SRS front airbag. When the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-
tem) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system), both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate while the system is checked, after which both indica-
tors turn off. After that, “ON” or “OFF” on the ON-OFF indicator will be
illuminated according to the position of the airbag manual on-off switch.
If any of the following problems occur, it is possible that there is a mal-
function in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.
The indicator light does not change when the airbag manual on-off
switch is switched to “ON” or “OFF”.
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, always install a child restraint system in a rear seat. In
the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as
long as the airbag manual on-off system is set to “OFF”.
If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag
deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.
When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger
seat
Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to “ON”.
If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which
may result in serious injury or even death.
154
1-7. Safety information
2
When driving
155
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle ............ 156
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)....... 169
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a smart
entry & start system)....... 178
Automatic
transmission ................... 181
Manual Transmission ....... 188
Turn signal lever............... 191
Parking brake ................... 192
Horn.................................. 193
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters.......... 194
Indicators and warning
lights............................... 198
Multi-information
display ............................ 203
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch................ 208
Fog light switch................. 215
Windshield wipers and
washer............................ 217
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control.................... 220
Driving assist systems ...... 225
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ........... 231
Winter driving tips ............. 233
Trailer towing .................... 237
156
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
Starting the engine
P. 169, 178
Driving
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 181)
Release the parking brake. (P. 192)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(P. 188)
Release the parking brake. (P. 192)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (P. 181)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N. (
P. 188)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
157
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking the vehicle
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 181)
Set the parking brake. (P. 192)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system:
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 188)
Set the parking brake. (P. 192)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system:
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the
wheels as needed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
158
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting off on a steep uphill
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
When the accelerator pedal is released
When driving on curves
When the brake pedal is firmly depressed
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
159
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
New vehicle break-in driving (the first 1600 km [1000 miles])
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions
during the first 1600 km (1000 miles):
Do not allow the engine speed to exceed 4000 rpm except in an emer-
gency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,
either fast or slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled
engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are
replaced with new ones.
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional perform the bedding down.
After the engine starts
In order to secure a rich exhaust sound when starting the vehicle and envi-
ronmental performance, air intake and exhaust sounds become loud and
vibrations may increase for a little while after the engine starts. This is not a
malfunction.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 435)
160
2-1. Driving procedures
REV indicator (if equipped)
CAUTION
When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase
immediately after starting the engine, when the air conditioning system is
operating, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping
to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as necessary.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
When the set engine speed is reached
the REV indicator comes on and a buzzer
sounds to inform the driver. (P. 205)
(When the engine speed enters the red
zone, the REV indicator flashes regard-
less of settings.)
161
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll
backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while
the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-
ately.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R
while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving back-
ward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not release the clutch pedal
too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle forward, possibly causing an
accident.
Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 428
162
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 182, 188)
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
When shifting the shift lever
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a
gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the
vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
Do not place items in the shift lever's surrounding area. It may cause incor-
rect operation.
If the shift boot is pulled out during cleaning, return it to its previous posi-
tion. If the shift boot is left pulled out, the shift lever may become difficult to
operate.
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as
possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,
causing an accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal
while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
Do not attach suction cups to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Suction cups or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle,
resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
166
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
Pre-driving check
Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result
in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment
and under the vehicle before starting the engine.
When driving the vehicle
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch,
transmission and gears.
Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so
may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may damage the
transmission.
When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
168
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not race the engine for
more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the
brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause
the transmission fluid to overheat.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 384, 393)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, differential, etc.
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
169
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
If the shift lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started.
(P. 181)
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The smart entry & start system indicator light (green) will turn on.
If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be
started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 10 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
170
2-1. Driving procedures
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
The smart entry & start system indicator light (green) will turn on.
If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be
started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 10 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the clutch
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
171
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Stopping the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 192)
Release the brake pedal.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light
(green) is off.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Set the parking brake. (P. 192)
Release the clutch pedal.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light
(green) is off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
172
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion) or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission)
released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
The smart entry & start system
indicator light (green) is off.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
The smart entry & start system
indicator light (green) flashes
slowly.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The smart entry & start system
indicator light (green) flashes
slowly.
*: Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: If the shift lever is
in a position other than P when
turning off the engine, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch
will be turned to ACCESSORY
mode, not to off.
173
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead
be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light
(green) flashes slowly and then press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch once.
Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light
(green) is off.
Auto power off function
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not
leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not run-
ning.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
174
2-1. Driving procedures
Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to
press and hold the switch.
Electronic key battery depletion
P. 44
Conditions affecting operation
P. 40
Note for the entry function
P. 41
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 91)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Steering lock
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing
the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels
the steering lock.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission:
Check that the shift lever is securely set
in P. The engine may not start if the shift
lever is displaced out of P. The smart
entry & start system indicator light (green)
will flash quickly.
175
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When the steering lock cannot be released
Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
When the smart entry & start system indicator light flashes in yellow
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 331
If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized
setting
P. 415
Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing
the battery and so forth
The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode, and start the engine after waiting at least 10
seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, how-
ever, this is not a malfunction.
The smart entry & start system indicator
light (green) will flash quickly.
Vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while
turning the steering wheel left and right.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
176
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress
the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
If the smart entry & start system indicator light flashes in green after the
engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering wheel is still
locked, and it may result in an accident.
Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds,
or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 428)
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will
be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
177
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
If the smart entry & start system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle,
always check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not stop the engine when the
shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another
shift lever position, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned
off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
When starting the engine
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch seems to be operating somewhat dif-
ferently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a mal-
function. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
178
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart entry & start system)
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
179
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to N (manual transmission) or P (automatic
transmission). (P. 181, 188)
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 91)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
When the steering lock cannot be released
Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing
the battery and so forth
The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be
unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
STEP
1
Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”
position.
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
180
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may
result if the engine is stopped while driving. (P. 428)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the engine running.
When starting the engine
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
and try to start the engine again after waiting for 10 seconds or more.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
181
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal
depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
: If equipped
182
2-1. Driving procedures
Shift position uses
*: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for
the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-
mended for normal driving.
Shift position Meter display Function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the
engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D
Normal D position driving*
(gears between “1” and “6” are
automatically selected)
(paddle shift switches acti-
vated)
Temporary manual mode driv-
ing (P. 186)
M Manual mode driving (P. 184)
183
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Selecting a driving mode
By pressing the driving pattern selector switch the following
modes can be selected to suit driving and usage conditions:
Normal mode
Sport mode
The “SPORT” indicator comes on.
Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous
regions with lots of curves.
Snow mode
The “SNOW” indicator comes on.
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces
such as snow.
To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same side of the
switch again.
184
2-1. Driving procedures
Manual mode driving
To enter manual mode, shift the shift lever to the M position.
When the Gear Shift Indicator is on, gears can be selected by operat-
ing the shift lever or paddle shift switches (if equipped), allowing you
to drive in the gear of your choosing.
The Gear Shift Indicator display is a guide to help the driver achieve
improved fuel economy and reduced exhaust emissions within limits
of engine performance.
Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for
the requested gear, the gear will not change.
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Upshifting (+)
Downshifting (-)
Each time the shift lever or pad-
dle shift switches are operated,
the gear changes up or down
one gear and the selected gear,
“1” through “6”, will be set.
The selected gear, from “1” to “6”,
and “M” will be displayed on the
shift position and shift range indi-
cator.
When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the shift lever
or paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in manual mode, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
When engine oil temperature is high and engine speed rises close
to the red zone.
185
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
When moving the shift lever out of P
If the shift lever is pushed sideways before the brake pedal is depressed,
shift lever operation may not be possible. Depress the brake pedal before
shifting the shift lever out of P.
Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
If downshifting operations are performed at a vehicle speed by which down-
shifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to
enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting
cannot be performed.
When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Downshifting can be performed even when using cruise control. After down-
shifting, the set speed continues. (P. 184, 186)
Sport mode
In sport mode, lower gears are used and gears change at a higher
engine speed.
If sport mode is changed to while the shift lever is in the M position, the
“SPORT” indicator will come on but sport mode controls will not be car-
ried out. Shift the shift lever to the D position.
Sport mode cannot be changed to when driving with cruise control acti-
vated.
Snow mode
To prevent slipping, 1
st
gear cannot be selected when in snow mode.
Sport mode and snow mode automatic deactivation
In the following situations, the driving mode is automatically deactivated:
When the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode or snow mode.
When cruise control is activated while driving in sport mode.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 412
186
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is
on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2
nd
gear for
stopping and starting off.
Temporary manual mode driving (vehicles with paddle shift switches)
Temporary manual mode driving will be deactivated and normal D position
driving will be returned to in the following situations:
When driving for longer than the set time (the set time differs according
to driving conditions).
When the vehicle comes to a stop.
When the accelerator pedal is continually depressed for longer than the
set time.
When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed.
Temporary manual mode driving can be
changed to by operating the paddle shift
switches while the shift lever is in the D
position.
When this occurs, the selected gear and
“D” are displayed on the shift position and
shift range indicator.
(When engine speed rises close to the
red zone, upshifting will be automatically
performed.)
Gear Shift Indicator: P. 184
187
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according
to the driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi-
tion. (Operating the paddle shift switches or shifting the shift lever to the M
position cancels the function.)
CAUTION
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in
the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
To prevent incorrect operation
Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift switches.
Doing so may unintentionally move the paddle shift switches.
Gear Shift Indicator
The indication of the gear shift indicator is only as a guideline for driving
more fuel-efficiently. The indicator does not inform the driver about the safe
shift operation timing. The driver has the responsibility for suitable shift oper-
ation depending on the traffic conditions or driving conditions (e.g., overtak-
ing or driving on an uphill slope).
This indicator supports the driver to drive more fuel-efficiently. The vehicle
system determines the shift operation timing depending on the driving condi-
tions, and informs the driver by the indicator on the combination meter. For
details, refer to Gear shift indicator.
188
2-1. Driving procedures
Manual Transmission
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
Shifting the shift lever to R
Shift the shift lever to R while
lifting up the ring section.
189
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Shift position indicator
The selected shift position will be
displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display.
The selected shift position will not
appear in the following situations:
When the shift lever is in N.
When the vehicle speed is 10
km/h (6 mph) or less (except
when the shift lever is in R).
When the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Gear Shift Indicator
The Gear Shift Indicator display is a guide to help the driver achieve
improved fuel economy and reduced exhaust emissions within limits
of engine performance.
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
The Gear Shift Indicator cannot
be deactivated.
Gear Shift Indicator display
The Gear Shift Indicator may not be displayed when your foot is placed
on the clutch pedal.
The Gear Shift Indicator may operate to prevent a possible engine stall at
a low engine speed.
190
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Gear Shift Indicator
The indication of the gear shift indicator is only as a guideline for driving
more fuel-efficiently. The indicator does not inform the driver about the safe
shift operation timing. The driver has the responsibility for suitable shift oper-
ation depending on the traffic conditions or driving conditions (e.g., overtak-
ing or driving on an uphill slope).
This indicator supports the driver to drive more fuel-efficiently. The vehicle
system determines the shift operation timing depending on the driving condi-
tions, and informs the driver by the indicator on the combination meter. For
details, refer to Gear shift indicator.
Usually, the gear shift indicator is a guideline for driving more fuel-efficiently,
and it also may operate to prevent a possible stall at a low engine speed.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the transmission
Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.
Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary and the clutch
pedal is fully depressed.
Do not shift the shift lever without
depressing the clutch pedal.
191
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Turn signal lever
Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of
the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
192
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Usage in winter time
P. 233
NOTICE
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while
depressing the brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it
completely while pressing the button.
193
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Horn
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(P. 78)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
194
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The switch positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-
cles.
Analog Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Digital Speedometer (if equipped)
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
195
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Odometer, trip meter and multi-information display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Multi-information display: Presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data. (P. 203)
“DISP” switch
P. 204
“ODO/TRIP” switch
P. 196
“km/h MPH” switch (if equipped)
Each time the switch is pressed, the display inside the meter changes
between km/h and MPH.
196
2-2. Instrument cluster
Switch the display
Each time the “ODO/TRIP” switch is pressed, the display changes as
follows.
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
Trip meter B
*
*
: Pressing and holding the “ODO/TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter that
is currently displayed.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
197
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the front position lights or the headlights turn on, the instrument panel
lights will dim. However, when the instrument panel brightness control dial is
turned to the up most position, the instrument panel lights will not dim even
when the front position lights or headlights turn on.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
P. 423)
198
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
indicators and warning lights illuminated.
Instrument cluster
Center panel
199
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 191)
Shift position indicator
(P. 189)
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 209)
Gear Shift Indicator
(P. 189)
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
(If equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 215)
Slip indicator
(P. 225)
Rear fog light indicator
(P. 215)
“TRC OFF” indicator
(P. 226)
Security indicator
(P. 91)
VSC off indicator
(P. 228)
(If equipped)
Smart entry & start sys-
tem indicator (P. 169)
“VSC SPORT” indicator
(P. 226)
Shift position and shift
range indicator
(P. 182)
(If equipped)
REV indicator
(P. 160)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Gear Shift Indicator
(P. 184, 186)
(If equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 220)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 183)
(If equipped)
“SET” indicator
(P. 220)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“SNOW” indicator
(P. 183)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
*
1, 2
*
1
*
1
*
1
200
2-2. Instrument cluster
*
1
: Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for details.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Airbag manual on-off indicator
(P. 151)
201
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 372)
*
1
: Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for details.
*
2
: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light
flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not
been released.
*
3
: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
(If equipped) (If equipped)
(for driver) (for front
passen-
ger)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
202
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately
if this occurs.
203
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the current outside air temperature.
Outside temperature
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Setting screen for the REV
indicator (if equipped)
204
2-2. Instrument cluster
Switch the display
Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed, the display changes as fol-
lows.
Outside temperature
P. 269
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer
than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
Setting screen for the REV indicator* (if equipped)
P. 205
*: Only displayed when the vehicle is stopped.
205
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Setting the REV indicator (if equipped)
Changing the REV indicator settings
The engine speed at which the REV indicator turns on at and
whether a buzzer sounds or not when the light turns on can be set.
Engine speed setting range: From 2000 to 7400 rpm (r/min)
Press the “DISP” switch repeatedly until the setting screen is
displayed. (P. 204)
Press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
“REV.” and the thousandth place
flash. After flashing, the number
changes each time the button is
pressed and held.
Press the “DISP” switch.
The hundredth place flashes.
After flashing, the number
changes each time the button is
pressed and held.
Press the “DISP” switch.
A buzzer sounds once, and setting of the engine speed value is
complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
206
2-2. Instrument cluster
Press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
Each time the “DISP” switch is
pressed and held, the buzzer
changes between activated and
deactivated.
“b-on”: Buzzer activated
“b-oFF”: Buzzer deactivated
When the setting changes from
“b-oFF” to “b-on”, the buzzer
sounds 3 times.
Press the “DISP” switch.
When the buzzer sounds, all settings have been completed. The set-
tings are displayed.
Deactivating the REV indicator settings
After setting the thousandth
place to “-”, press the “DISP”
switch once.
STEP
5
STEP
6
207
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The multi-information display operate when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift
position number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display
changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive
engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
208
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Off
The daytime running lights
turn on.
The headlights, front
position, daytime run-
ning lights and so on
turn on and off auto-
matically. (Vehicles
without a smart entry &
start system: When the
engine switch is in the
“ON” position
Vehicles with a smart
entry & start system:
When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON mode)
The front position, tail,
license plate and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
(if equipped)
209
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
210
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
Guide to dial settings
Occupancy and luggage load conditions
Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
Driver None 0
Driver and front
passenger
None 0
All seats occupied None 1
All seats occupied Full luggage loading 2
Driver Full luggage loading 2
211
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Daytime running light system
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever
the engine is started, the shift lever is shifted out of P and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: To make your vehicle more visible to
other drivers, the daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the
engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights
are not designed for use at night.
Vehicles with discharge headlights
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers, the front position lights turn on automatically whenever the
engine is started, the shift lever is shifted out of P and the parking brake is
released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: To make your vehicle more visible to
other drivers, the front position lights turn on automatically whenever the
engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights
are not designed for use at night.
Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
Headlight control sensor is located on the
passenger's side.
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
212
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Automatic light off system (if equipped)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
When the light switch is in or
: The headlights turn off auto-
matically if the key is removed from the engine switch.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the light switch off once and then back to
or .
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
When the light switch is in or
: The headlights turn off auto-
matically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to
or
.
Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position and
the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the engine switch
while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the
headlights do not interfere with other road users.
213
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Battery-saving function (if equipped)
In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery
from being discharged:
The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
The key is removed from the engine switch (vehicles without a smart
entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off
(vehicles with a smart entry & start system).
The light switch is in or .
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start sys-
tem)
When the light switch is operated
When the door is opened or closed
214
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Turning on the low beam headlights when the vehicle is parked in dark
areas
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
Turn off the engine with the light switch
in or off, and pull the light switch
toward you and release it. The low
beam headlights will turn on for about
30 seconds to light up the area around
the vehicle.
The lights are turned off in the following
situations.
Vehicles without a smart entry &
start system: The engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start
system: The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
The light switch is turned on.
The light switch is pulled toward you
and then released.
215
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Fog light switch
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
Rear fog light switch
Turns the rear fog lights on.
Releasing the switch ring
returns it to .
Operating the switch ring again
turns the rear fog lights off.
216
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog lights can be used when
Rear fog light switch
The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Front and rear fog light switch
Front fog lights: The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Rear fog lights: The front fog lights are turned on.
Front and rear fog light switch
Turns the front and rear fog
lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
Turns both front and rear
fog lights on
Releasing the switch ring
returns it to .
Operating the switch ring again
turns only the rear fog lights
off.
217
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Windshield wipers and washer
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper
interval can be adjusted.
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
218
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
Vehicles with discharge head-
lights: When the headlights are
on and the lever is pulled and
held, the headlight cleaners
will operate once.
219
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator (green)
will come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
: If equipped
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment (vehicles with a km/h odometer display): By approxi-
mately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated.
Fine adjustment (vehicles with an mph odometer display): By approxi-
mately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
222
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control can be set when
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
The shift lever is in D or M and the vehicle is in the 2
nd
gear or higher.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Vehicles with a manual transmission
The vehicle is in the 2
nd
gear or higher.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission only) is
depressed.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more than
approximately 32 km/h (20
mph).
223
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 32 km/h (20 mph).
VSC is activated.
The system may be malfunctioning when
In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
The cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow.
The cruise control indicator does not come on even when the “ON-OFF”
button is pressed while the engine is running.
224
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
During emergency towing
225
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
When the TRC/VSC systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRC (brake LSD func-
tion)/VSC systems are operat-
ing.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
TRC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
The TRC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function.
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
226
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the TRC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRC system may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn
the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.
To turn the TRC system off,
quickly press and release the
button.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light will
come on.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.
“VSC SPORT” mode
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accom-
modate various driving preferences. The control modes can be
selected with the “VSC SPORT” mode switch. Normal mode allows
secure and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed, “VSC
SPORT” mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the VSC
and TRC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a
driver may have imagined, while a sense of security is retained.
“VSC SPORT” mode/Normal
mode
The “VSC SPORT” indicator and
VSC off indicator come on when
in “VSC SPORT” mode.
227
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Selecting TRC mode and VSC mode
Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows:
Driving
conditions
TRC
modes
VSC modes Indicator lights
Normal roads
On Normal mode
Rough roads Off Normal mode
Sport driving
On
“VSC SPORT”
mode
Off
“VSC SPORT”
mode
Off Off
228
2-4. Using other driving systems
Turning off both TRC and VSC systems
To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3
seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light and the VSC off indicator light will come on.
In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.
Press the button again to turn the systems back on.
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRC and VSC
systems
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake
pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the
vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction
has occurred in any of these systems.
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Automatic reactivation of TRC and VSC systems
After turning the TRC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automati-
cally reactivated in the following situations:
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: When the engine switch is
turned to “LOCK” position
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned off
If only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC will turn on when vehicle
speed is more than approximately 50 km/h (31 mph).
If both the TRC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation
will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
229
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine
off. The EPS system should return to normal after a little while.
Automatic deactivation of “VSC SPORT” mode
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
When the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position after driving in “VSC
SPORT” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in “VSC
SPORT” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
CAUTION
The ABS does not operate effectively when
Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
TRC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
230
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
When the VSC and/or brake LSD function is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
231
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
CAUTION
Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
232
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent
the pedals from being depressed properly, block the drivers vision, or
hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
On the package tray
On the instrument panel
On the dashboard
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
Load and distribution
Do not overload your vehicle.
Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control
which may cause death or serious injury.
233
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
Engine oil
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the rear tires.
Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all
4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pat-
tern. Also, make sure to use tire chains that match the size of the
tires.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis,
around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
234
2-5. Driving information
If a door is opened and closed when its side window is frozen,
the window safety device will operate and the side window
open/close function linked to door operation may not operate
correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has
melted.
Open the side window until it is approximately halfway
open.
Fully close the window by pulling the switch up to the one-
touch closing position and continue holding the switch for 1
second or more after the window fully closes.
The window position is reset and the safety device operations will
be released.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you
and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to
road conditions.
When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold
latitudes)
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.
STEP
1
STEP
2
235
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting tire chains
We recommend that you consult any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for infor-
mation about the chains that you can use.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
Tire chains
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving approximately 100 m (328 ft.).
Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same size, same maker,
same brand and tread pattern.
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-
ified for the snow tires being used.
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
236
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Driving with tire chains
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit: When any of the tires
are punctured, you can seal the tire temporarily. However, do not use the
tire chain on a sealed tire. If any of the rear tires are punctured although it
is required to use tire chains, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains
being used, or 30 km/h (19 mph), whichever is lower.
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains - overconfidence
because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
NOTICE
Using the tire chains
Use only chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage
the vehicle body or suspension.
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
237
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your Toyota is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
238
2-5. Driving information
3
Interior features
239
3-1. Using the air
conditioning system
and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system ............................ 240
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................ 248
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers............. 256
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/USB
port ................................. 258
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................ 259
Interior light..................... 260
3-4. Using the storage
features
List of storage features..... 261
Glove box ....................... 262
Bottle holders ................. 263
Cup holders/
console tray .................... 264
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors......................... 266
Vanity mirrors.................... 267
Clock................................. 268
Outside temperature
display ............................ 269
Ashtray.............................. 270
Power outlets.................... 271
Seat heaters ..................... 273
Floor mat........................... 275
Trunk features................... 278
240
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
Adjusting the settings
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan.
Vehicles without the button: Turn the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise to increase the temperature.
: If equipped
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air conditioning on/off button
(if equipped)
Temperature control dial
Outside air or recirculated air mode
STEP
1
STEP
2
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Vehicles with the button: To adjust the temperature
setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air
or heated air.
To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the
desired position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can
also be selected for more delicate adjustment.
STEP
2
STEP
3
242
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Set the air outlet selection dial to
position.
If the recirculated air mode is
used, it will automatically switch
to the outside air mode.
Perform the following operations accordingly:
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con-
trol dial.
Vehicles with the button: If the dehumidification func-
tion is not operating, press to operate the dehumidifi-
cation function.
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the
air flow and temperature up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
243
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
244
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside
the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside
the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
When defrosting the side win-
dows, face the right and left side
outlets toward them.
245
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Open the air outlet.
Close the air outlet.
Right and left side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
246
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Fogging up of the windows
Vehicles with the button: The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning
on will dehumidify the air
from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
Vehicles with the button: If you turn
off, the windows may
fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
recommended to prevent outside air from entering the vehicle interior.
Vehicles with the button: During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F) (vehicles with
the button)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
247
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Ventilation and air conditioning odors
To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
Air conditioning filter
P. 328
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
248
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is automatically
adjusted according to the set temperature setting.
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-
cles.
*1
: Left-hand drive vehicles
For the driver’s side
Right-hand drive vehicles
For the front passenger’s side
*2
: Left-hand drive vehicles
For the front passenger’s side
Right-hand drive vehicles
For the driver's side
Windshield defogger
Temperature control dial
*1
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Temperature setting
display
*1
Off
Automatic
mode
Dual operation button
Changes the air outlets used
Air conditioning on/off button
Temperature control dial
*2
Temperature setting
display
*2
Fan speed control dial
Fan speed/Air
outlet display
: If equipped
249
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Turn temperature control dial clockwise to increase the tem-
perature and turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to
decrease the temperature on the driver’s side.
When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the pas-
senger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated are maintained.
Adjusting the settings manually
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counter-clock wise (decrease).
Press to turn the fan off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
250
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
To adjust the temperature settings, turn the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise (warm) or counter-clock wise (cool).
To adjust the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool) on the passenger side to separately adjust the tem-
perature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode).
Press (the indicator on turns off) to return the driver
and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous
mode).
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultane-
ous modes each time is pressed.
To change the air outlets, press .
The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button
is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The dehumidification function
operates and fan speed
increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode button to outside air mode
if the recirculated air mode is
used. (It may switch automati-
cally.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press
again when the
windshield is defogged.
STEP
2
STEP
3
251
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
If the recirculated air mode is
used, it may automatically switch
to the outside air mode.
252
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air mode and recirculated air mode
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
When defrosting the side win-
dows, face the right and left side
outlets toward them.
253
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Open the air outlet.
Close the air outlet.
Right and left side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
254
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
If you turn
off, the windows may fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior.
During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool
the vehicle interior effectively.
Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0C (32F)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
is
pressed.
255
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Ventilation and air conditioning odors
To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
Air conditioning filter
P. 328
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
256
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out-
side rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or
raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-
cles.
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
*: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
257
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
The defoggers can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view
mirror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
When continuous operation is set (vehicles with an automatic air con-
ditioning system)
During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 minutes
after every 15 minutes of continual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that
operation stops, the operating light remains illuminated. The rear window
defogger will continue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off.
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional (vehi-
cles with an automatic air conditioning system)
The rear window defogger can be set to 15-minute operation or continuous
operation. (Customizable features P. 447)
CAUTION
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with out-
side rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
258
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/USB port
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
: If equipped
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Depending on the type of portable audio device, some device opera-
tion may not be available.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
259
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior light (P. 260)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-
tem)
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
260
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior light
Turns the light off
Turns the door position on
Turns the light on
Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes:
Interior light (when the switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart entry & start system)
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with a smart entry & start
system)
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features
P. 447)
Interior light
261
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
Bottle holders
Cup holders (if equipped)/console tray
262
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
Pull up the lever to open the
glove box.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove box
263
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Bottle holders
When using the bottle holder
When storing a bottle, close the cap.
The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a pet bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders
264
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders (if equipped)/console tray
Changing the cup holder position
Changing the console tray size
Remove the cup holder and change the
holder position.
Remove the cup holder.
Cup holders/console tray
265
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Before driving, place the cup holder in the rear position so that it does not
hinder shift lever operation.
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
When placing the cup holder, make
sure it is facing the correct direction.
Failure to do so will cause the cup
holder to not be secure in the console
tray and hinder shift lever operation.
Cup holders/console tray
266
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
267
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.
Open the cover to use.
Vehicles with vanity lights: The
light turns on when the cover is
opened.
: If equipped
268
3-5. Other interior features
Clock
The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds to the nearest
hour
*
*: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
00
269
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h
[12 mph])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “- -” is displayed more than 1 minute or the outside temperature
is not displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of
-40°C (-40°F) and 50°C (122°F).
The outside temperature dis-
play can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
(P. 204)
270
3-5. Other interior features
Ashtray
CAUTION
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may
occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.
To prevent fire
Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
The ashtray can be installed in
the cup holder. (P. 264)
: If equipped
271
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A
or less.
In the console tray
In the glove box (if equipped)
272
3-5. Other interior features
The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
273
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters
The seat heaters can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
When not in use
Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.
CAUTION
Burns
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
: If equipped
Press the switch to warm the
seats.
The indicator light comes on
when a seat heater is turned
on.
Rapid heating
Normal heating
274
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
275
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Front
Driver’s seat floor mat
Front passengers seat floor
mat
Retaining hook (clip) eye-
lets
Rear
Rear seat floor mats
Installing the floor mats (front)
Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
STEP
1
STEP
2
*
276
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
When installing a floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
Driver’s seat floor mat: Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
Front: Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips)
provided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Before driving
Front: Check that the floor mat is
securely fixed in the correct place with
all the provided retaining hooks (clips).
Be especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
Driver’s seat: With the engine stopped
and the shift lever in P (automatic trans-
mission) or N (manual transmission),
fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
277
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
When installing the rear floor mats
Make sure that the rear floor mats are
installed in the correct position. If a floor
mat is positioned incorrectly, it may inter-
fere with the seat rail or other parts when
a front seat is moved forward or back-
ward, damaging the vehicle or floor mat.
278
3-5. Other interior features
Trunk features (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)
Auxiliary box
Vehicles with a luggage mat:
Lift up the luggage mat.
279
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Warning reflector storage box
Depending on the size and shape of the warning reflector case, it may not
be able to be stored.
CAUTION
When storing a warning reflector
Make sure that the warning reflector is stored securely.
Failure to do so may cause it jump out of position in the event of sudden
braking, etc., causing an accident.
Warning reflector storage box
The warning reflector can be
stored.
280
3-5. Other interior features
4
Maintenance and care
281
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ......... 282
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior .......... 285
Cleaning and protecting
the Alcantara
®
area........ 289
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 291
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................... 294
Hood ................................. 297
Positioning a floor jack...... 299
Engine compartment......... 301
Tires.................................. 314
Tire inflation pressure....... 323
Wheels.............................. 325
Air conditioning filter ......... 328
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery...... 331
Checking and replacing
fuses............................... 335
Light bulbs ........................ 343
282
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front
of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear
spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehi-
cle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
283
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Parts containing resin such as the bumper
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to
become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers
until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear
bumper diffusers can cause burns.
284
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
Protective film for side sill plates (if equipped)
Make sure to remove the protective film. Failure to do so may cause rust,
depending on conditions.
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side
wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning
the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
285
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
When the interior is extremely dirty, wipe away the dirt using a
soft cloth slightly dampened with diluted neutral detergent.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
286
4-1. Maintenance and care
Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 109)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
287
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or
alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor
the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
Do not use a chemical agent containing silicone (highly-polymerized sili-
con compound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the
air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas.
If silicon (highly-polymerized silicon compound) contacts these compo-
nents, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunction.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
Remove any dust, dirt, sand, oil spots etc. on leather surfaces immedi-
ately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
288
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
When cleaning the instrument panel
When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panel’s
surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without add-
ing water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge
may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the surface.
289
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara
®
area
: If equipped
The following procedures will protect and keep your vehicle’s Alcan-
tara
®
upholstery in top condition:
Day-to-day cleaning
Perform the following procedures regularly (approximately once
a month).
Wipe the entire Alcantara
®
area with a soft cloth that has
been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 40C
[104F]) and squeezed out.
Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Alcantara
®
uphol-
stery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth.
Once dry, brush the area with a soft brush.
Liquid stains
If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or
similar to soak up the liquid.
When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Alcantara
®
uphol-
stery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush
or similar.
We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after
the above has been performed.
When a stain cannot be removed using the above procedures,
remove it by performing the following:
Lightly wipe the stained area from the outside to the inside
from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been damp-
ened with lukewarm water (approximately 40C [104F])
and squeezed out.
Do not wipe the area so strongly that it causes the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface to become uneven. Also, prepare a clean
cloth, and always use a clean area of the cloth.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
290
4-1. Maintenance and care
When removing dirt or dust from the Alcantara
®
areas
Remove dirt or dust from the Alcantara
®
areas by lighting brushing with a
soft brush. If this does not remove the dirt or dust, remove it using adhesive
tape.
NOTICE
When soaking up spilled liquids
Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so
may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up
the liquid more difficult.
If the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface becomes uneven,
lightly brush it with a soft brush.
Allow the surface to dry completely.
Oil stains
You will need the following items:
A cloth that has been dampened with benzene
A dry cloth
Using a dry cloth or tissue paper, wipe away as much of the
oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding.
After patting the area from the outside to the inside from
multiple angles using the cloth dampened with benzene,
soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by patting the
area with a dry cloth.
If the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface becomes uneven,
lightly brush it with a soft brush.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
291
4
Maintenance and care
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. Toyota recommends the following mainte-
nance.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For full details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Toyota Ser-
vice Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little
mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools
and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if
you're an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that
repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer will keep a record of
maintenance, which could be useful should you ever require Warranty
Service. Should you choose to select a qualified and equipped profes-
sional other than an authorized Toyota repairer to service or maintain
your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of mainte-
nance be kept.
292
4-2. Maintenance
Where to go for maintenance service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the highest possible condition, Toyota
recommends that all repairs and service operations be carried out by autho-
rized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly qualified and equipped profes-
sionals. For repairs and services covered by your warranty, please visit an
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will use genuine Toyota parts in
repairing any difficulties you may encounter. There can also be advantages
in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repairers for non-warranty repairs
and services, as members of the Toyota network will be able to expertly
assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance
on your vehicle - reliably and economically due to their experience with
Toyota vehicles.
Does your vehicle need repairs?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs
that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-
tioning system after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon mon-
oxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system
checked immediately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal or clutch pedal,
pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.
293
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or
death.
Warning in handling of the battery
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 308)
294
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 308)
•Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Distilled water
Engine coolant level (P. 305)
“TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-
mixed Super Long Life Coolant
BLUE” or similar high-quality
ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite
and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid
technology. “TOYOTA Genuine
50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life
Coolant BLUE” is pre-mixed with
50% coolant and 50% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
Engine oil level P. 302)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P. 335)
Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 343)
Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Flathead screwdriver
295
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
When working on the engine compartment
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
Items Parts and tools
Radiator and condenser
(P. 307)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 323)
Tire pressure gauge
Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 312)
Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
Funnel
296
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Be sure the engine switch is
off. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may
automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tem-
perature is high. (P. 307)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Be sure the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is off. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION
ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air
conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 307)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
297
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Push the auxiliary catch lever
to the left and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into the
slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
298
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
When opening the hood
Do not lift up or operate the wipers. Doing so may cause the hood and wip-
ers to contact, scratching the hood.
Use caution when opening the engine hood in windy weather as it may
close suddenly in strong wind.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota products to the
engine hood. Such additional weight on the engine hood may cause it to
be too heavy to be supported by the supporting rod when opened.
When closing the hood
Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the hood as doing so
may result in damage.
299
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
300
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-
ported only by the floor jack.
Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift
the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or R (vehicles
with a manual transmission).
Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
When raising the vehicle, ensure that there is sufficient surrounding space.
The vehicle’s position may change slightly when lowered.
Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
301
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
*: For right-hand drive vehicles: This is located on the opposite side of the
engine compartment.
Battery* (P. 308)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 302)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 303)
Washer fluid tank (P. 312)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (if equipped)
(P. 307)
Radiator (P. 307)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 305)
Fuse box (P. 335)
302
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the
lower measurement to determine the level of oil.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
303
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil
selection
P. 436
Oil quantity
(Low Full)
1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp. qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
304
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow-
ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle
or after replacing the engine
If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating frequently
When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
CAUTION
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
305
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional pressure test the cap and
check for leaks in the cooling system.
306
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant selection
Only use “TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant
BLUE” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-
ogy.
“TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -35C [-31F])
For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
307
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
308
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
Caution symbols
The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are as
follows:
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Hold-down clamp
Terminals
No smoking, no naked
flames, no sparks
Battery acid
Shield eyes
Note operating
instructions
Keep away from chil-
dren
Explosive gas
309
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking battery fluid
Check that the level is between
“UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER
LEVEL”.
“UPPER LEVEL”
“LOWER LEVEL”
If the fluid level is at or below
“LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled
water.
Adding distilled water
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by
looking directly at the cell.
Put the vent plug back on and close securely.
Low O.K.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
310
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
Unlocking the doors using the smart entry & start system may not be
possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
Start the engine with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCES-
SORY mode. The engine may not start with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec-
ond attempt.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If
the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was discon-
nected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery.
Take extra care when connecting the battery if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
312
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.
NOTICE
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-
sion.
Using the gauge
The washer fluid level can be checked by
observing the position of the level on the
liquid-covered holes in the gauge.
If the level falls below the second hole
from the bottom (the “LOW” position),
refill the washer fluid.
CTH43AS134
Current
fluid level
313
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules
and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the “TWI” or
” marks, etc., molded on
the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
Tire rotation
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and help
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is car-
ried out approximately every
10000 km (6000 miles).
Front
315
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional. (P. 317)
Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the
installed tires
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and help
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is car-
ried out approximately every
10000 km (6000 miles).
Tire pressure warning system
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(P. 375)
Front
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or
the engine switch (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-
tem) off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (P. 443)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate
based on this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or engine
switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry &
start system).
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
317
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Wait for a few min-
utes with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON
mode and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Wait for a few
minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then
turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
5
318
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not regis-
tered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving
for about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking
for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life
Any tires over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if
they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pres-
sure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your rou-
tine of daily vehicle checks.
If the tread on snow tires wears down 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance
will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires.
Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive
carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tire pressure warning system certification
320
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
321
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a
tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires
are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
Only use radial tires.
Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure
warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it
may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not
installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire
pressure warning valves could be bound.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.
Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when
replacing the tire. (P. 315)
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the cush-
ioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause dam-
age to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
Low profile tires and wheels (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel
when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the
following:
Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they
may be damaged more severely.
Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure
to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
If tire pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
323
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tire inflation pressure
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
Reduced fuel efficiency
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
Reduced safety
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Instructions for checking tire pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation
pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and han-
dling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for
the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation
pressure should be checked at least once per month. However,
Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once
every two weeks. (P. 443)
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may
occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause
air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost,
replace them as soon as possible.
325
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
326
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide
advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever
wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must
be installed. (P. 315)
CAUTION
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-
less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
When installing the wheel nuts
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-
dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease
from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward. Install-
ing the nuts with the tapered ends fac-
ing outward can cause the wheel to
break and eventually cause the wheel
to come off while driving, which could
lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
Tapered portion
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with
non-genuine wheels.
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box and pull the glove box
toward you to disconnect the
claws.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
329
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Lower the glove box slowly
until surface is horizontal
with the floor, then pull it out.
(Simply pulling with gentle
force will disengage the lower
claws.)
Lower claw
Lower claw engagement
point
Do not forcibly pull the glove
box. Otherwise, the lower
claws or the lower claw
engagement points may be
deformed, making it difficult to
reinstall or close the glove box.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
When removing the glove box
Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower
claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or
close the glove box.
When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart entry & start
system), or CR1632 (vehicles with a smart entry & start sys-
tem)
Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart entry & start
system)
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
To prevent the buttons from
being disassembled, face the
button surface downward.
Remove the module.
STEP
1
STEP
2
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart entry & start
system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
333
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or
CR1632 (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appli-
ance shops or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
The smart entry & start system (if equipped) and wireless remote control
will not function properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
When putting the module back (vehicles without a smart entry & start
system)
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
Insert the module from directly above.
Inserting it on an angle may prevent the
key buttons from operating properly.
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
Certification for the lithium battery
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP
1
STEP
2
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 338) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
338
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1
MIR HTR 7.5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
2
RDI 25 A Electric cooling fan
3
(PUSH-AT) 7.5 A Engine control unit
4
ABS NO. 1 40 A ABS
5
HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system
6
WASHER 10 A Windshield washer
7
WIPER 30 A Windshield wipers
8
RR DEF 30 A Rear window defogger
9
(RR FOG) 10 A Rear fog light
10
D FR DOOR 25 A Power window (driver’s side)
11
(CDS) 25 A Electric cooling fan
12
D-OP 25 A
13
ABS NO. 2 25 A ABS
14
D FL DOOR 25 A Power window (passenger’s side)
15
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
339
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
16
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
17
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
18
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
19
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
20
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
21
ST 7.5 A Starting system
22
ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
23
(STR LOCK) 7.5 A Steering lock system
24
D/L 20 A Power door lock
25
ETCS 15 A Engine control unit
26
(AT+B) 7.5 A Transmission
27
(AM2 NO. 2) 7.5 A Smart entry & start system
28
EFI (CTRL) 15 A Engine control unit
29
EFI (HTR) 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
30
EFI (IGN) 15 A Starting system
31
EFI (+B) 7.5 A Engine control unit
32
HAZ 15 A
Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
33
MPX-B 7.5 A
Automatic air conditioning system,
gauge and meters
34
F/PMP 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
35
IG2 MAIN 30 A
SRS airbag system, engine control
unit
36
DCC 30 A
Interior light, wireless remote con-
trol, main body ECU
Fuse Ampere Circuit
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Note
One of each of the following spare fuses are provided: 7.5 A, 10 A, 15
A, 20 A, 25 A, 30 A.
37
HORN NO. 2 7.5 A Horn
38
HORN NO. 1 7.5 A Horn
39
H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
40
H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
41
H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
42
H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
43
INJ 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
44
H-LP WASHER 30 A Headlight cleaners
45
AM2 NO. 1 40 A Starting system, engine control unit
46
EPS 80 A Electric power steering
47
A/B MAIN 15 A SRS airbag system
48
ECU-B 7.5 A
Wireless remote control, main body
ECU
49
DOME 20 A Interior light
50
IG2 7.5 A Engine control unit
Fuse Ampere Circuit
341
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1
ECU ACC 10 A
Main body ECU, outside rear view
mirrors
2
P/POINT No.2 15 A Power outlet
3
PANEL 10 A Illumination
4
TAIL 10 A Tail lights
5
DRL 10 A Daytime running light system
6
STOP 7.5 A Stop lights
7
OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
8
HEATER-S 7.5 A Air conditioning system
9
HEATER 10 A Air conditioning system
10
FR FOG LH 10 A Left-hand front fog light
11
FR FOG RH 10 A Right-hand front fog light
12
BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights
13
ECU IG1 10 A ABS, electric power steering
14
AM1 7.5 A Starting system
15
AMP 15 A Audio system
16
AT UNIT 15 A Transmission
17
GAUGE 7.5 A
Gauge and meters, smart entry &
start system
18
ECU IG2 10 A Engine control unit
19
SEAT HTR LH 10 A Left-hand seat heater
20
SEAT HTR RH 10 A Right-hand seat heater
21
RADIO 7.5 A Audio system
22
P/POINT No.1 15 A Power outlet
342
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
After a fuse is replaced
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 343)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger
that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement
is carried out by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Preparing a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 444)
Front bulb locations
Headlights (high beam)
(vehicles with halogen
headlights)
Headlights (low beam) (vehicles with
halogen headlights)
Side turn
signal lights
Front turn signal lights
Front position lights (vehicles
with halogen headlights)
Daytime running lights
(vehicles with
halogen headlights)
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License
plate
lights
Rear fog
light
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replacing light bulbs
Headlight low beams (vehicles with halogen bulbs)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight low beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is
leaking through the mounting.
Headlight high beams (vehicles with halogen bulbs)
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Install a new bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn and secure the bulb. Install
the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight high beams on once
and visually confirm that no light
is leaking through the mounting.
Front position lights (vehicles with halogen headlights)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Side turn signal lights
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
Remove the clip and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Release the light’s claw.
Insert the screwdriver into the
hole. While firmly pushing the
screwdriver forward, move it
towards the inside of the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the screwdriver
with a tape.
Pull out the lamp and turn the
lens counterclockwise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Front turn signal lights
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
Remove the clips and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Daytime running lights (vehicles with halogen headlights)/
front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
Remove the clips and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
1
STEP
2
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Daytime running lights/front
fog lights
Front fog lights
Unplug the connector and
remove the light bulb.
Daytime running lights
Remove the light bulb.
Daytime running lights
Remove the light bulb.
Replace the light bulb with a new one.
Daytime running lights/front fog lights
Turn and secure the bulb. Install the connector.
Daytime running lights
Turn and secure the bulb.
When installing the fender liner, install by conducting
with the directions reversed.
STEP
3
STEP
3
STEP
5
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
5
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
5
STEP
2
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Front fog lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
Remove the clips and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Rear turn signal lights
On some models, remove a clip
and partly remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Back-up lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
3
STEP
2
STEP
3
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear fog light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
3
STEP
2
STEP
3
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
License plate lights
Vehicles with a trunk panel
cover: Remove the trunk panel
cover clips and partly remove the
trunk panel cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Headlight high and low beams (discharge bulb)
Front position lights (vehicle with discharge headlights)
Daytime running lights (vehicle with discharge headlights)
Stop/tail lights
High mounted stoplight
Door courtesy lights
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional for more information in
the following situations:
Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,
or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal
power is restored.
LED light bulbs
The front position lights (vehicles with discharge headlights), stop/tail lights
and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs
burn out, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this
vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent over-
load, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unus-
able.
Removing and installing the luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover
clip
CAUTION
Replacing light bulbs
Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
When changing the rear fog light or back-up lights
Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipe has cooled sufficiently. The
lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot exhaust pipe can
cause burns.
Removing
Installing
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Discharge headlights (if equipped)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional, before replacing the discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).
Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the head-
lights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 25000 V will be discharged and could result
in serious injury or death by electric shock.
Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight
bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
5
When trouble arises
361
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.......... 362
If your vehicle needs to
be towed......................... 363
If you think something is
wrong.............................. 370
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................ 371
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................ 372
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with a
spare tire) ....................... 384
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with an
emergency tire
puncture repair kit).......... 393
If the engine will
not start .......................... 409
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ............ 412
If you lose your keys......... 413
If the electronic key
does not operate
properly........................... 414
If the battery is
discharged...................... 418
If your vehicle
overheats........................ 423
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 426
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency...................... 428
362
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will
flash. To turn them off, press
the switch once again.
5
363
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional before towing.
The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing
eyelet may be used.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional or a commercial towing service, using a
lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the vehicle's front wheels and axles must be
in good condition. (P. 368)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
364
5-1. Essential information
Towing eyelet
Before emergency towing
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running) position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION
ON (engine running) mode.
If towing a vehicle
Do not tow another vehicle. If towing a vehicle that has broken down is
unavoidable, avoid towing a vehicle that is heavier than your vehicle. Also,
do not pull out a vehicle that has fallen into a ditch.
CAUTION
Caution while towing
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
365
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
Installing towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.
Front
NOTICE
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency
towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission.
To prevent damage to the vehicle
When towing this vehicle, make sure to observe the following:
Do not use a wire rope
Keep vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph) and do not tow for dis-
tances over 30 km (19 miles)
Tow the vehicle in the forward direction
Do not apply rope to the vehicle's suspension and so forth
Do not tow another vehicle, boat (trailer) and so forth, that is heavier than
this vehicle.
When towing down a long slope
Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck. (P. 368, 369)
If a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck is not used, the brakes may overheat,
leading to poor brake performance.
STEP
1
366
5-1. Essential information
Rear
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by
hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
367
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
Towing with a sling-type truck
Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 384, 394
CAUTION
Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This
may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
After towing
Always remove the towing eyelet. Failure to do so can cause the SRS air-
bags to not operate correctly in the event of a frontal collision.
NOTICE
To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
368
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission: Use a towing dolly
under the rear wheels.
Vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion: We recommend using a
towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
release the parking brake and
shift the shift lever to N.
From the rear
Vehicles without a smart entry &
start system: Turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” position so
that the steering wheel is
unlocked.
Vehicles with a smart entry &
start system: Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to
ACCESSORY mode so that the
steering wheel is unlocked.
5
369
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
NOTICE
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing
using a wheel-lift type truck (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
To prevent damaging the vehicle
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Do not tow the vehicle from
the rear when the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or the key is
removed. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the
front wheels straight.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off. The steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate
clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
370
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
371
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
372
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light
Low brake fluid
Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
373
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-
ately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system;
The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The seat belt pretensioner system.
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS;
The brake assist system.
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system.
(Flashes in
yellow for 15
seconds.)
Smart entry & start system indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the smart entry & start system.
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC system;
The TRC system
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light (if
equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling
system.
374
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Comes on in
yellow)
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank becomes com-
pletely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle immediately. The
malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional as soon as possible.
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
The electric power steering warning light may come on and the warning
buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops.
CAUTION
When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
375
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that both side doors
and the trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Remaining fuel
(Approximately 7.0 L
[1.8 gal., 1.5 Imp. gal.] or
less)
Refuel the vehicle.
(On the instru-
ment cluster)
Drivers seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(On the center
panel)
Front passengers seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the front passenger
to fasten his or her seat
belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
376
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Tire pressure warning
light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
Natural causes (P. 377)
Flat tire (P. 384, 393)
Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure (including the spare
tire) to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the
light does not turn off even
if the tire inflation pressure
is adjusted, have the sys-
tem checked by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure warning system
(P. 378)
Have the system checked by
any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warning
light (if equipped)
Indicates that the auto-
matic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and shift the shift lever
to P.
If the light goes off after a lit-
tle while, the vehicle can be
driven. If the light does not
go off, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
377
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
*
: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The drivers and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer
sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 20
km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound
in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and warning
buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing
the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warn-
ing light.
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as
natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In
this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light
(after a few minutes).
378
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not
registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
If the tire inflation pressure is 380 kPa (3.87 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 55 psi) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are
nearby.
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels,
the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types
of tires.)
If tire chains are used.
If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in
the trunk.
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for
approximately one minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for
approximately one minute when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart
entry & start system), have it checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
5
379
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause
loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the
tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the
nearest any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
NOTICE
To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
380
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with a smart entry &
start system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
Continuous
Continuous
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission:
The electronic key was car-
ried outside the vehicle and
the driver’s door was opened
and closed while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch.
Change the
shift position
to P.
Bring the
electronic key
back into the
vehicle.
5
381
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission:
The electronic key was car-
ried outside the vehicle and
the driver’s door was opened
and closed while the shift
position P was selected with-
out turning off the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.
Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission:
The electronic key was car-
ried outside the vehicle and
the driver's door was opened
and closed while the shift
position N was selected with-
out turning off the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off or bring
the electronic
key back into
the vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than off and the electronic
key outside of the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
382
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Continuous
(5 seconds)
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle with the elec-
tronic key and lock the doors
without first turning the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch off.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
off and lock
the doors
again.
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when
attempting to start the
engine.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Intermit-
tently
(7 sec-
onds)
(Flashes
in yellow)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
An attempt was made to
drive when the regular key
was not inside the vehicle.
Confirm that
the electronic
key is inside
the vehicle.
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Indicates that the electronic
key battery is low.
Replace the
battery.
(P. 331)
Once
(Flashes
quickly in
green for
15 sec-
onds.)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Indicates that the steering
lock has not been released.
Release the
steering lock.
(P. 175)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
5
383
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
The electronic key could not
be detected in the vehicle
even after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was
pressed once.
Vehicles with
an automatic
transmission:
Touch the
electronic key
to the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
Vehicles with
a manual
transmission:
Touch the
electronic key
to the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
while
depressing
with the
clutch pedal.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
384
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion) or R (vehicles with a manual transmission).
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flashers.
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack handle
Spare tire
Towing eyelet
Screwdriver
Jack
Wheel nut
wrench
5
385
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Taking out the spare tire
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel chock
positions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
386
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
387
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand
to approximately the same
amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP
1
Disc wheel
Tapered portion
STEP
2
STEP
3
388
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
120 N•m (12.2 kgf•m, 89 ft•lbf)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP
4
After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 315)
Storing the tire
STEP
5
Always install the center fastener as
shown in the illustration.
5
389
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Certification for the jack
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the
vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-
ing and removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-
ing tires on this vehicle.
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace
the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working
on or near the vehicle may be injured.
5
391
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
CAUTION
Replacing a flat tire
Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately
after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or
other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 120 N
m (12.2
kgf
m, 89 ftlbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads
or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered
ends facing inward. (P. 326)
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
Stowing the jack
When stowing the jack in the jack holder, make sure that the part that the
jack handle attaches to is pointing towards the inside of the trunk. Failure to
do so may damage the vehicle body.
When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.
Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when
replacing the tire. (P. 315)
5
393
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is
equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit.
A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread
can be repaired temporarily using the emergency tire puncture repair
kit. (The kit contains a bottle of sealant. The sealant can be used only
once to temporarily repair one tire without removing the nail or
screw from the tire.) Depending on the damage, this kit cannot be
used to repair the tire. (P. 396)
After temporarily repairing the tire with the kit, have the tire repaired
or replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional. Repairs conducted using
the emergency tire puncture repair kit are only a temporary measure.
Have the tire repaired and replaced as soon as possible.
Before repairing the tire
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion) or N (vehicles with a manual transmission).
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flashers.
394
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and
tools
*: Use of the jack (P. 385)
Contents
Screwdriver
Emergency
tire puncture
repair kit
Jack handle
Towing eyelet
Jack*
Wheel nut
wrench
Sealant
Injection
hose
Valve core tool
Valve core
(spare)
Compressor
Stickers
Extension hose (for
extracting the sealant)
Quick reference
5
395
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Before performing emergency repair
Check the degree of the tire
damage.
• Do not remove the nail or
screw from the tire. Removing
the object may widen the
opening and prevent emer-
gency repair with the repair kit.
To avoid sealant leakage,
move the vehicle until the area
of the puncture, if known, is
positioned at the top of the
tire.
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
Vehicles with a luggage mat:
Remove the luggage mat.
Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit.
In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency
tire puncture repair kit. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure
When there are any cracks or damage at any location on the tire, such as
on the side wall, except the tread
When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) long or more
When the wheel is damaged
When two or more tires have been punctured (the sealant can be used
only once to temporarily repair one tire)
When more than 2 sharp objects such as nails or screws have passed
through the tread on a single tire
When the sealant has expired
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
397
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Emergency repair method
Shake the sealant bottle up and down several times and
remove the cap of the sealant bottle.
Connect the injection hose by
screwing onto the sealant. As it
is screwed in, the aluminum seal
on the bottle will be torn.
Position the nail or screw that
has punctured the tire at the bot-
tom, in contact with the ground.
Remove the cap from the valve.
Bring the protruding part of the
valve core tool into contact with
the valve to discharge air.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Injection
hose
Sealant
STEP
3
Valve
Cap
STEP
4
Valve
Protruding part
Valve core
tool
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Pull out the valve core by turning
it counterclockwise using the
valve core tool.
Remove the plug from the injec-
tion hose.
Connect the injection hose to the
valve.
Inject the sealant that is in the
bottle. Hold and tilt the bottle,
then squeeze sealant out of the
bottle as shown.
STEP
5
Valve core
STEP
6
Plug
Injection
hose
STEP
7
Valve
Injection
hose
STEP
8
5
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Remove the injection hose from
the valve and screw the valve
core in the valve securely by
turning it clockwise with the
valve core tool.
Attach the sticker as shown.
Remove any dirt and moisture
from the wheel before attaching
the label. If it is impossible to
attach the label, make sure to tell
any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional when
you have them repair and replace
the tire that sealant is injected.
Store the kit and then attach the
sticker as shown.
STEP
9
Valve
core tool
Valve core
STEP
10
STEP
11
400
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connect the compressor power
plug to the power outlet.
Vehicles without a smart entry &
start system: The engine switch
must be in the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start
system: The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch must be in ACCES-
SORY mode.
Connect the air compressor
hose by threading it on the valve.
Left-hand drive vehicles: Check
the specified inflation pressure.
The label is placed as shown in
the illustration.
Right-hand drive vehicles: Check
the specified inflation pressure.
The label is placed as shown in
the illustration.
Power
outlet
STEP
12
Power plug
STEP
13
Compressor
Hose
STEP
14
STEP
14
5
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Turn the compressor switch “ON”
and fill the tire with air until the
specified inflation pressure is
reached.
Turn the switch “OFF” when the pressure gauge connected to
the hose reads the specified pressure.
If the inflation pressure is not attained within 10 minutes, emergency
repair is not possible due to severe damage. Contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
After completely filling the tire with air, disconnect the hose
from the valve on the tire and pull the power plug of the com-
pressor out of the power outlet on the vehicle.
To spread the liquid sealant evenly in the tire, immediately
drive for about 10 minutes.
After driving about 10 minutes,
pull your vehicle over in a safe
place and reconnect the com-
pressor.
STEP
15
Switch
STEP
16
STEP
17
STEP
18
STEP
19
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Read the inflation pressure on
the pressure gauge.
If the pressure is 130 kPa (1.3
kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi) or above,
fill the tire with air using the com-
pressor until the specified infla-
tion pressure is reached.
If the pressure is less than 130
kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi),
the emergency repair that have
been performed is not safe for
use as damage to the tire is too
severe. Do not continue to drive
the vehicle. Contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-
tion and sharp turns, drive carefully at under 80 km/h (50
mph) to the nearest authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for tire repair
or replacement.
STEP
20
STEP
21
5
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
The valve of a tire that has been repaired
After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit, the valve
should be replaced.
Note for checking the emergency tire puncture repair kit
Check the sealant expiry date occasionally.
The expiry date is shown on the bottle. Do not use sealant whose expiry
date has already passed. Otherwise, repairs conducted using the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly.
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used
only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant has been used
and needs to be replaced, purchase a new bottle at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. The compressor is reusable.
The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is -40°C (-40°F)
or more.
The repair kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally
installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than
the original ones, or for any other purposes.
The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bot-
tle. The bottle of sealant should be replaced with a new bottle before the
expiry date. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for replacement.
If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.
If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the
stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe
away the sealant with a wet cloth.
During operation of the repair kit, a loud operation noise is produced.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
Do not use to check or to adjust the tire pressure.
404
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
Driving with a flat tire may cause a circumferential groove on the side wall. In
such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit.
Caution while driving
Store the repair kit in the trunk.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
The repair kit is exclusively only for your vehicle.
Do not use repair kit on other vehicles, which could lead to an accident
causing death or serious injury.
Do not use repair kit for tires that are different size than the original ones,
or for any other purpose. If the tires have not been completely repaired, it
could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
Precautions for use of the sealant
Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant,
consume as much water as possible, and then immediately consult a doc-
tor.
If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with
water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.
5
405
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
CAUTION
When fixing the flat tire
Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.
If force is used to turn the valve core tool while air remains in the tire, spe-
cial care should be taken because the valve core could fly out.
Be careful, as sealant may fly out if you shake the bottle with the hose
installed.
Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after
the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the
brakes may be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or
other body parts may result in burns.
Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.
If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur
as sealant may be sprayed out.
If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that
the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.
406
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When fixing the flat tire
After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the
hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.
Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the procedures not fol-
lowed, the sealant may spray out.
Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it
bursting while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any
cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop
the repair operation immediately.
The repair kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not
operate the repair kit continuously for more than 10 minutes.
Parts of the repair kit become hot during operation. Be careful when han-
dling the repair kit during and after operation. Do not touch the metal part
around the connecting area between the bottle and compressor. It will be
extremely hot.
Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the
one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is
located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air-
bag from operating properly.
Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turn-
ing and cornering.
If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering
wheel, stop the vehicle and check the following.
Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.
Tire inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3
kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi) or less, the tire may be severely damaged.
5
407
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
NOTICE
When performing an emergency repair
A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit if
the damage is caused by a sharp object such as nail or screw passing
through the tire tread.
Do not remove the sharp object from the tire. Removing the object may
widen the opening and disenable emergency repair with the repair kit.
The repair kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the repair kit is not
exposed to water, such as when it is being used in the rain.
Do not put the repair kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the
side of the road. If the repair kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may
occur.
Do not put the valve core on dirty ground or in the sand.
Store it in a clean place.
Do not remove the inside cap of the sealant bottle.
Turn the valve core tool with your hand when screwing it in. If you use
another tool in conjunction with the valve core tool, damage may occur.
Precautions for the emergency tire puncture repair kit
The repair kit power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do
not connect the repair kit to any other source.
If gasoline splatters on the repair kit, the repair kit may deteriorate. Take
care not to allow gasoline to contact it.
Place the repair kit in a storage to prevent it from being exposed to dirt or
water.
Store the repair kit in the trunk out of reach of children.
Do not disassemble or modify the repair kit. Do not subject parts such as
the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.
408
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.
Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when
replacing the tire. (P. 315)
5
409
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 169, 178), consider each of the following
points.
The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 169, 178)
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 91)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 418)
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over. (vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 410)
410
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15
seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 418)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehi-
cles with a smart entry & start system)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional if the problem cannot be
repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
411
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in N.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal and clutch
pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
412
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
413
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. For
vehicles without a smart entry & start system, bring a master key
and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles
with a smart entry & start system, bring the other key and the key
number stamped on the key number plate.
414
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Unlocking and locking the doors, unlocking the trunk
Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the
doors and trunk. (P. 31)
Doors
Vehicles without a double
locking system
Locks driver’s door
Unlocks driver’s door
Vehicles with a double lock-
ing system
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
Trunk (left-hand drive vehicles only)
Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 40) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk
can be opened or the engine can be started by following the proce-
dure below.
5
415
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake
pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will turn to IGNITION ON
mode.
When the smart entry & start sys-
tem is deactivated in customiza-
tion setting, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will turn to ACCES-
SORY mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the smart entry
& start system indicator light (green) turns on.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
416
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in N and depress the clutch
pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will turn to IGNITION ON
mode.
When the smart entry & start sys-
tem is deactivated in customiza-
tion setting, the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will turn to ACCES-
SORY mode.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal and check that the smart
entry & start system indicator light (green) turns on.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
417
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Stopping the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the
engine.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N and press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the
engine.
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.
(P. 331)
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each
time the switch is pressed. (P. 172)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Release the clutch pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each
time the switch is pressed. (P. 172)
If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart entry & start
system
Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.
STEP
3
STEP
3
418
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle following
the steps below.
Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro-
cedures:
Left-hand drive vehicles
STEP
1
5
419
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Right-hand drive vehicles
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system only: Open and
close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Maintain the
engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine
switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehicle's engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Maintain the
engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the
vehicle's engine.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
420
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
Avoiding a discharged battery
Turn off the headlights and the air conditioning system while the engine is
off.
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)
In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart
entry & start system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a
malfunction.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional as soon as possible.
STEP
5
5
421
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle.
When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it
was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the bat-
tery, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was in
before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting
the battery.
CAUTION
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near
the battery.
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the battery.
422
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter
may overheat and become a fire hazard.
NOTICE
When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
When closing the doors
While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close
the door.
Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will
not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly
scratching both the vehicle body and window, or even shattering the window.
5
423
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-
sides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine and call any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 439)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
STEP
5
5
425
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N
(vehicles with a manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear
wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear
wheels to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (vehicles with an
automatic transmission) or 1 or R position (vehicles with a
manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
Press to turn off TRC.
5
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
CAUTION
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart entry
& start system: Stop the
engine by turning the engine
switch to the “ACC” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
CAUTION
If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Never attempt to remove
the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
Vehicles with a smart entry &
start system: To stop the
engine, press and hold the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch for 2 consecutive sec-
onds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in suc-
cession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP
4
STEP
5
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
6
Vehicle specifications
431
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 432
Fuel information................ 445
6-2. Customization
Customizable features...... 447
432
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*
1
: Unladen vehicle
*
2
: Vehicles without a front spoiler
*
3
: Vehicles with a front spoiler
*
4
: Vehicles without side skirts
*
5
: Vehicles with side skirts
Overall length
4240 mm (166.9 in.)
*
2
4255 mm (167.5 in.)*
3
Overall width
1775 mm (69.9 in.)
*
4
1795 mm (70.6 in.)*
5
Overall height*
1
1320 mm (52.0 in.)
Wheelbase 2570 mm (101.2 in.)
Tread
Front 1520 mm (59.8 in.)
Rear 1540 mm (60.6 in.)
Gross vehicle mass
Details are described on the manufac-
turer’s label. (P. 433)
Maximum permissi-
ble axle capacity
Front 876 kg (1931 lb.)
Rear 943 kg (2079 lb.)
433
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped under
the right-hand front seat.
This number is located on the
top left of the body panel.
This number is also on the man-
ufacturer’s label.
434
6-1. Specifications
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
435
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Engine
Fuel
*: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 RON is not available,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no
detriment to engine durability or driveability.
Model FA20
Type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-
stroke gasoline
Bore and stroke 86.0 86.0 mm (3.39 3.39 in.)
Displacement 1998 cm
3
(121.93 cu.in.)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type
EU area:
Unleaded gasoline conforming to European stan-
dard EN228 only
Except EU area:
Unleaded gasoline only
Research octane num-
ber
98 or higher*
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)
436
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another
motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade:
0W-20 and 5W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”, SN
“Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference*)
Without filter
With filter
5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.6 Imp. qt.)
5.4 L (5.7 qt., 4.8 Imp. qt.)
437
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-20 is filled into your
Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,
and the best choice for good fuel
economy and good starting in
cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 oil is not available,
SAE 5W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change
Preferred
438
6-1. Specifications
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: The oil quality desig-
nation by API (American Petro-
leum Institute) (SN)
Center portion: The SAE viscosity
grade (SAE 0W-20)
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel saving and environmental
protection.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Specification Advisory Com-
mittee) Certification Mark is
displayed on the front of the con-
tainer.
439
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
7.2 L (7.6 qt., 6.3 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long
Life Coolant BLUE”
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-
ogy
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO ZXE27HBR8
0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
440
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Differential
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for further details.
Battery
Specific gravity reading at
20C (68F):
1.250 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 1.200 Half charged
1.060 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Oil capacity (Reference) 1.15 L (1.22 qt., 1.01 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Without LSD
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear
Oil LT
Other gear oil that meets API GL-5
and SAE 75W-85
With LSD
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear
Oil LX
Other LSD gear oil that meets API
GL-5 and SAE 75W-85
441
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Automatic transmission
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
NOTICE
Differential gear oil
Using a differential gear oil other than “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil”
may cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and poor fuel con-
sumption.
Never use different brands together.
Fluid capacity* 7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accom-
panied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your
vehicle.
442
6-1. Specifications
Manual transmission
Clutch
Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type and viscosity
Use either of the following:
“TOYOTA Genuine MG Gear Oil special
II”
Other gear oil that meets API GL-3 and
SAE 75W-90 specifications
NOTICE
Manual transmission gear oil
Using a manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine MG
Gear Oil special II” may cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and
poor fuel consumption.
Never use different brands together.
Pedal free play 5 15 mm (0.2 0.6 in.)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
443
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Brakes
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,
110 lbf) while the engine is running.
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,
45.0 lbf).
Steering
Tires and wheels
Pedal clearance*
1
55.0 mm (2.16 in.) min.
Pedal free play 0.5 2.0 mm (0.020 0.079 in.)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
7 8 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Tire size 205/55R16 91V, 215/45R17 87W
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 35 psi)
Wheel size 16 6 1/2 J, 17 7 J
Wheel nut torque 120 N•m (12.2 kgf•m, 89 ft•lbf)
444
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
A: D4S discharge bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) D: HB3 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: Double end bulbs
G: H8 halogen bulbs
Light Bulbs W Type
Exterior
Headlights
High beam (halogen bulbs)
Low/high beam (discharge bulbs)
Low beam (halogen bulbs)
60
35
55
D
A
B
Front turn signal lights 21 C
Front position lights (vehicles with halogen
headlights)
5E
Daytime running lights 13
Front fog lights (vehicles with discharge head-
lights)
24
Front fog lights (vehicles with halogen head-
lights) (if equipped)
35 G
Rear turn signal lights 21 C
Back-up lights 16 E
Rear fog lights 21 E
License plate lights 5 E
Side turn signal lights 5 C
Interior
Vanity lights (if equipped) 2 F
Interior light 10 F
Door courtesy lights (if equipped) 5 C
Trunk light (if equipped) 5 C
445
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If your engine knocks
Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 or higher. If 98 RON
fuel is not readily available in your area, unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no detriment to engine
durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease
in maximum engine performance and you may hear some knocking
(pinking) of an engine while using 95 RON fuel. Use of 95 RON fuel
will not affect your warranty coverage.
446
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.
EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85” and
fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. The use of
these fuels will damage the vehicle's fuel system. In case of any doubt,
ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Except EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85”
and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. Your
vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10% max ethanol. The use of fuel
with more than 10% ethanol content (E10) will damage the vehicle’s fuel
system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source
where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In case of any
doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
447
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart entry
& start sys-
tem
(
P. 33)
Smart entry & start sys-
tem
On Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On Off
Number of permissible
times of continuous
smart lock
Twice Unlimited
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(
P. 51)
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On Off
Door lock buzzer
(vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)
On Off
Trunk unlocking func-
tion
On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
448
6-2. Customization
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(
P. 51)
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion
Push and hold
(short)
Push and hold
(long)
One short push
Two short
pushes
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 208)
Light sensor sensitivity ±0% -40% to +40%
Lights
(
P. 208)
Time that the low beam
headlights are on when
the vehicle is parked
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
Rear window
defogger
(
P. 256)
Time elapsed before
the rear window defog-
ger turn off (vehicles
with an automatic air
conditioning system)
15 minutes Continue
Illumination
(
P. 259)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On Off
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
off
On Off
Interior light illumination
upon approach (vehi-
cles with a smart entry
& start system)
On Off
Interior light illumination On Off
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Index
449
Abbreviation list...................... 450
Alphabetical index................... 451
What to do if... ......................... 462
450
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSD Limited Slip Differential
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
451
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................240, 248
ABS...........................................225
Air conditioning filter ..............328
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............328
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................248
Manual air conditioning
system ................................240
Airbags
Airbag manual on/off
system ................................151
Airbag operating
conditions ...................113, 119
Airbag precautions for
your child ............................125
Airbag warning light ..............373
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ...........119
Curtain shield airbag
precautions.........................125
General airbag precautions...125
Locations of airbags..............104
Modification and
disposal of airbags..............129
Proper driving posture...102, 125
Side airbag operating
conditions ...........................119
Side airbag precautions........125
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions ...........................119
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions ............125
SRS airbags..........................104
Anti-lock brake system...........225
Ashtray .....................................270
Audio input...............................258
Audio system
Audio input............................258
AUX port ...............................258
Portable music player ...........258
USB port ...............................258
Automatic air conditioning
system....................................248
Automatic headlight
leveling system .....................212
Automatic light
control system....................... 208
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission.........181
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 412
Manual mode........................184
Mode select switch ...............183
AUX port...................................258
Auxiliary box............................278
A
452
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs.............343
Wattage.................................444
Battery
Checking...............................308
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery..............418
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................233
Bottle holders...........................263
Brake
Parking brake........................192
Brake assist..............................225
Break-in tips.............................159
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control.................................196
Care
Alcantara
®
............................289
Exterior ................................. 282
Interior...................................285
Seat belts..............................286
Chains.......................................233
Child restraint system
Baby seats, definition............133
Baby seats, installation.........141
Child seats, definition............133
Child seats, installation.........141
Installing CRS with ISOFIX
rigid anchor......................... 145
Installing CRS with
seat belts............................ 142
Installing CRS with
top straps............................ 146
Junior seats, definition..........133
Junior seats, installation .......141
B
C
453
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions................125
Battery precautions.......311, 421
Child restraint system ...........133
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................73
Installing child restraints........141
Power window lock switch ......83
Power window precautions.....86
Removed key battery
precautions.........................334
Seat belt guide........................72
Seat belt precautions ..............74
Seat heater precautions........273
Trunk precautions ...................60
Cleaning
Alcantara
®
.............................289
Exterior..................................282
Interior...................................285
Seat belts..............................286
Clock.........................................268
Condenser................................307
Console tray.............................264
Cooling system
Engine overheating...............423
Cruise control ..........................220
Cup holders..............................264
Customizable features ............447
Daytime running light
system....................................211
Defogger
Rear window.........................256
Side mirror ............................256
Dimension ................................432
Display
Multi-information display.......203
Trip information.....................204
Do-it-yourself maintenance....294
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights..............259
Wattage ................................ 444
Doors
Door lock.....................33, 51, 55
Door windows.........................83
Double locking system..........100
Side mirrors ............................ 80
Driver's seat belt
reminder light........................375
Driving
Break-in tips..........................159
Correct posture.....................102
Procedures ...........................156
Winter drive tips.................... 233
D
454
Alphabetical index
Electric power steering...........225
Electronic key
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ...........414
Emergency flashers
Switch ...................................362
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ...........414
If the engine will not start......409
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ................412
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery..............418
If the warning buzzer
sounds................................372
If the warning light
turns on...............................372
If you have a flat tire .....384, 393
If you lose your keys .............413
If you think something is
wrong..................................370
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................426
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency..........................428
If your vehicle needs to
be towed.............................363
If your vehicle overheats.......423
Engine
Compartment........................301
Engine switch................ 169, 178
Hood .....................................297
How to start the
engine.........................169, 178
Identification number ............433
If the engine will not start......409
Ignition switch ............... 169, 178
Overheating ..........................423
Engine coolant
Capacity................................439
Checking............................... 305
Engine coolant temperature
gauge......................................194
Engine immobilizer system ......91
Engine oil
Capacity................................436
Checking............................... 302
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 233
Engine switch ..................169, 178
Engine switch light..................259
EPS ...........................................225
Event data recorder................... 24
E
455
Alphabetical index
Floor mat ..................................275
Fluid
Washer..................................312
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............343
Switch ...................................215
Wattage.................................444
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............343
Switch ...................................215
Wattage.................................444
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light ........................375
Front position lights
Replacing light bulbs.............343
Switch ...................................208
Wattage.................................444
Front seats
Adjustment..............................63
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............343
Switch ...................................191
Wattage.................................444
Fuel
Capacity................................435
Fuel gauge............................194
Fuel pump shut off system....371
Gas station information.........464
Information............................445
Refueling.................................87
Fuel door ....................................87
Fuel filler door............................87
Fuel pump shut off system.....371
Fuses ........................................335
Gauges ..................................... 194
Glove box .................................262
Hazard lights
Switch ...................................362
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................ 69
Headlight cleaner.....................217
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions.........................360
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Switch ...................................208
Wattage ................................ 444
Heaters
Seat heaters .........................273
Side mirror ............................256
Hood ......................................... 297
Horn ..........................................193
F
G
H
456
Alphabetical index
Identification
Engine...................................433
Vehicle ..................................433
Ignition switch..................169, 178
Ignition switch light
Ignition switch light................259
Illuminated entry system.........259
Immobilizer system ...................91
Indicator lights.........................198
Inside rear view mirror..............79
Interior light
Interior light ...........................260
Switch ...................................260
Wattage.................................444
Jack
Positioning a floor jack..........299
Vehicle-equipped
jack .............................384, 393
Jack handle......................384, 393
Keyless entry .............................51
Keys
Electronic key .........................30
Engine switch................ 169, 178
If you lose your keys.............413
If your electronic key
battery is discharged ..........414
Key number ............................ 30
Keyless entry .......................... 51
Keys........................................30
Mechanical key.......................31
Wireless remote control key ...51
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Wattage ................................ 444
Light bulbs
Replacing..............................343
Wattage ................................ 444
Lights
Door courtesy lights..............259
Emergency flasher switch.....362
Engine switch light................ 259
Fog light switch.....................215
Hazard light switch................ 362
Headlights switch..................208
Interior light switch................260
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Turn signal lever ................... 191
Vanity lights ..........................267
Wattage ................................ 444
I
J
K
L
457
Alphabetical index
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance...294
Maintenance data .................432
Maintenance requirements ...291
Manual air conditioning
system....................................240
Manual transmission...............188
Meter
Instrument panel
light control .........................196
Meters...................................194
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ............79
Side mirror heater .................256
Side mirrors.............................80
Vanity mirrors........................267
Multi-information display........203
Odometer..................................194
Oil
Engine oil ..............................302
Opener
Fuel filler door.........................87
Hood .....................................297
Trunk.......................................58
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............80
Outside temperature
display....................................269
Overheating, Engine................423
Parking brake...........................192
Power outlets...........................271
Power windows..........................83
Radiator....................................307
Rear fog lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Switch ...................................215
Wattage ................................ 444
Rear seats .................................. 67
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Switch ...................................191
Wattage ................................ 444
Rear window defogger............256
Replacing
Fuses....................................335
Key battery............................ 331
Light bulbs ............................ 343
Tires......................................384
REV indicator...........................205
M
O
P
R
458
Alphabetical index
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............71
Child restraint system
installation...........................141
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts......................286
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) ....................73
How to wear your seat belt .....71
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................73
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use..............75
Reminder light.......................375
Seat belt guide........................72
Seat belt pretensioners...........72
Seat heaters .............................273
Seats
Adjustment..............................63
Adjustment precautions ..........66
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............141
Cleaning................................285
Head restraint .........................69
Properly sitting in the seat.....102
Seat heaters..........................273
Service reminder
indicators ..............................198
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........181
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ................412
Manual transmission.............188
Shift lock system.....................412
Side airbags ............................ 104
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding ..............80
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Switch ...................................191
Wattage ................................ 444
Smart entry & start system
Antenna location.....................35
Entry function.......................... 33
Starting the engine................169
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ..................443
Storage location....................384
Spark plug................................439
Specifications..........................432
Speedometer
Speedometer........................194
Steering
Column lock release ...............78
Steering wheel
Adjustment..............................78
Storage feature ........................261
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 426
S
459
Alphabetical index
Sun visors ................................266
Switch
Airbag manual on/off.............151
Driving mode selector
switch..................................183
Emergency flasher switch.....362
Engine switch................169, 178
Fog light switch .....................215
Hazard light switch................362
Ignition switch ...............169, 178
Light switches .......................208
“ODO/TRIP” switch ...............196
Power door lock switch...........56
Power window switch..............83
Transmission shift
switches......................184, 186
Window lock switch.................83
Wiper and washer switch......217
Tachometer
Tachometer........................... 194
Tail lights
Switch ...................................208
Theft deterrent system
Double locking system..........100
Engine immobilizer system..... 91
Tire inflation pressure.............443
Tires
Chains...................................233
Checking............................... 314
Emergency tire puncture
repair kit..............................393
If you have a flat tire .....384, 393
Inflation pressure ..................323
Replacing..............................384
Rotating tires......................... 314
Size.......................................443
Snow tires............................. 233
Spare tire ..............................384
Tire pressure warning
system........................314, 375
Tools.................................384, 393
Towing
Emergency towing................363
Traction control.......................225
Transmission shift
switches.........................184, 186
TRC ...........................................225
Trip meter.................................194
Trunk
Opener....................................58
Trunk light
Wattage ................................ 444
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 343
Switch ...................................191
Wattage ................................ 444
T
460
Alphabetical index
USB port ...................................258
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................267
Wattage.................................444
Vanity mirrors ..........................267
Vehicle identification
number ...................................433
Vehicle stability control ..........225
VSC ...........................................225
“VSC SPORT” mode................226
Warning buzzers
Electric power steering ......... 373
Seat belt reminder ................375
Warning lights
Automatic headlight
leveling system...................373
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature
warning light....................... 375
Anti-lock brake system..........373
Brake assist system.............. 373
Brake system........................372
Charging system................... 372
Cruise control
indicator light ......................373
Electric power steering
system warning light...........373
Electronic engine control
system................................373
Engine oil pressure...............372
Low fuel level........................375
Low tire pressure ..................375
Malfunction indicator lamp....373
Open door............................. 375
Pretensioners........................373
Seat belt reminder light.........375
Slip indicator light..................373
Smart entry & start
system........................373, 380
SRS airbags.......................... 373
Tire pressure warning
system................................375
Washer
Checking............................... 312
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 233
Switch ...................................217
U
V
W
461
Alphabetical index
Washing and waxing ...............282
Wheels ......................................325
Window glasses ........................83
Window lock switch...................83
Windows
Power windows.......................83
Rear window defogger..........256
Washer..................................217
Windshield wipers...................217
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking...................51
Replacing the battery............331
Wireless remote control key....51
462
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 384
P. 393
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 409
If the engine will not start
P. 91
Engine immobilizer system
P. 418
If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 412
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 423
If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 413
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 418
If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 55
Doors
The vehicle is stuck in mud
or sand
P. 426
If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 372
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
463
What to do if...
Warning lights
P. 372 P. 373
P. 372 P. 373
P. 372 P. 375
P. 373 P. 375
P. 373 P. 375
P. 373 P. 375
P. 373 P. 375
P. 373, 380
P. 375
P. 373
*: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
Brake system warning
light
Automatic headlight leveling sys-
tem warning light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Cruise control indicator
light
*
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Open door warning light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Low fuel level warning
light
SRS warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
ABS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Electric power steering
warning light
Tire pressure warning
light
Smart entry & start system
indicator light
Automatic transmission fluid tem-
perature warning light
Slip indicator
464
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 297
Trunk opener
P. 58
Hood lock release lever
P. 297
Fuel filler door
P. 87
Tire inflation pressure
P. 443
Fuel filler door opener
P. 87
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 87, 435
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P. 443
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
L (qt., Imp. qt.)
Without filter 5.2 (5.5
, 4.6)
With filter 5.4 (5.7, 4.8)
Engine oil type P. 436
462

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Toyota GT86 - 2014 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Toyota GT86 - 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 11,17 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Toyota GT86 - 2014

Toyota GT86 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 500 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info